JP7440925B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are equipped with a variable ball entry device are known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2003-325811A

Here, it is desired that gaming machines be designed to increase attention to the games.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
a firing means for firing a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A variable entry mode that can be switched between a first mode in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter the ball or enter the ball easily, and a second mode in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the first mode. ball means;
Variable ball entry control means that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode;
means capable of transitioning to a first specific state based on establishment of specific conditions;
Equipped with
At least the first specific state is one in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means can be performed,
When a first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first specific state, the first state can be set such that a transition to a second specific state subsequent to the first specific state is executed. and a means for
When the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the first specific state, a transition to the second specific state and a transition to a third specific state subsequent to the second specific state occur. means for enabling the second state to be executed;
Equipped with
If neither the first predetermined condition nor the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the first specific state ends, the transition to the second specific state is not executed,
In the first specific state, if the first predetermined condition is not satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a transition to the second specific state is executed based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition. , the transition to the third specific state based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is not executed .

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. It is a front view of a back pack unit. (a) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows an accessory device. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the rotating body unit which comprises an accessory device. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the rotating body unit. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an open timing table. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows abnormality monitoring processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game stop determination processing. It is a flowchart showing game control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows control start processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing under control. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the action part in an accessory. It is a flowchart showing winning processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening/closing pattern table. 7 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each release. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first distribution pattern table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second distribution pattern table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of distribution patterns. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining distribution characteristics. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening. It is a flowchart which shows round update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for passing through an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball determination processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing the gameplay of each round game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of remaining ball monitoring. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode in the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening-and-closing pattern table concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball determination processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for open while based on 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second round game. It is an explanatory view for explaining an open timing table concerning a 5th embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing remaining ball determination processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of remaining ball determination. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining an open timing table concerning a 6th embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing game control processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball determination processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game when the waiting time for shutter opening has elapsed without the first opening/closing execution mode occurring. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time for shutter opening has elapsed. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the opening standby time and the flow of the game related to the first opening/closing execution mode. It is a perspective view which disassembles and shows the rotating body unit which comprises the accessory device based on 7th Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the setting process for each round, and (b) is a flowchart showing the setting process of the opening/closing member. (a) and (b) are flowcharts showing the round update process, and (c) is a flowchart showing the processing for the action part within the accessory. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode. It is a figure showing another example of a gaming machine.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the right and left sides as a support side. Further, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right sides as a support side. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right sides as a support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A window portion 61 is formed in the front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 so that almost the entire area of a gaming area, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, it is not limited thereto, and may be made of synthetic resin and colorless and transparent.

Around the window section 61, light emitting means such as various lamp sections are provided. A display light emitting section 63 is provided above the window section 61 as a part of the various lamp sections. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting section 63, speaker sections 64 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge 65 and a lower bulge 66 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, a game ball is fired toward the game area from the game ball firing mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13. In this case, by changing the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60, the firing strength, that is, the momentum of the firing of the game ball fired toward the game area is changed.

The game area is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. The configuration of the game board 24 will be explained below based on FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail section 32 and an outer rail section 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a gaming area is formed so as to be partitioned by these inner rail section 32 and outer rail section 33. In addition, these inner rail portions 32 and outer rail portions 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for guiding game balls to the gaming area, and game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism when the player rotates the firing handle 60 are The player is guided to the upper part of the gaming area by the guide rail 34.

The guide rail 34 is formed such that its exit portion faces toward the upper center of the gaming area on one side of the gaming area. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area changes from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side opposite thereto. Shifting to the department side. Note that the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the gaming area.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front and back direction are formed by router processing in the range defined as the game area on the game board 24. Each opening includes a general prize opening 35, a first operating opening (first starting ball entry part) 38, a second operating opening (second starting ball entry part) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display section 43, an accessory display section 44, etc. are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general prize opening 35, the first operating opening 38, the second operating opening 39, and the accessory device 150, it is detected by the detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) installed on the back side of the game board 24. , second operation sensor 39c, and entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 10, etc.)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection results. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 and a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out, and seven prize balls enter the general winning port 35. When a ball is generated, 8 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 39 is greater than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 38, and the number of prize balls in both operating ports 38 and 39 is The number may be different.

In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area through the out port 45. Furthermore, a large number of nails 46 are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and refers not only to the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area after passing through the opening; It also includes a mode in which the game region continues to flow without being played. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 45, the game ball entering the accessory device 150, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, or the through gate 41 will be described as follows. Hitting the ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

Accessory device 150 is arranged approximately in the center of game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction below this accessory device 150 on the game board 24. Two first operating ports 38 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory device 150, and a second operating port 39 is provided at a position sandwiched between these left and right first operating ports 38. In relation to the accessory device 150, the left and right first operating ports 38 are arranged so as to sandwich the accessory device 150, and a game ball that does not enter the accessory device 150 is placed in either of the first operating ports. It is possible to reach 38 (win a prize). Further, the horizontal distance between both first operating ports 38 and the accessory device 150 is greater than the diameter of one game ball, and the distance between the first operating port 38 and the accessory device 150 is greater than the diameter of one game ball. Game balls can flow downward.

Further, the second operating port 39 is arranged below the accessory device 150. The second operating port 39 is arranged slightly below both the first operating ports 38, so that game balls that have not entered the accessory device 150 or the first operating port 38 can reach the second operating port 39. (Balls can enter).

The second operating port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to an electric accessory drive section 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive section 39b to be in the closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is placed in either an open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 39a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating opening 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is in the open state, it becomes possible to enter the second operating opening 39.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two conditions: a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second operating port 39, and a state where winning is more difficult than the above-mentioned state where winning is more likely to occur, although winning is not impossible. A configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 39a can be switched. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 39a is disabled and switching between a state in which winnings are likely to occur and a state in which winnings are less likely to occur is performed by displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

The main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 disposed along the lower outer edge of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends forward from the surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the gaming area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 to make the gaming area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

A main display section 43 and an accessory display section 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. In other words, the main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are visible in front of both display sections 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

In the main display section 43, the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in the respective operating ports 38 and 39 are clearly displayed by displaying a pattern or the like.

Note that the main display section 43 is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may also be configured by other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix. In addition, the patterns displayed on the main display section 43 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include the displayed configuration.

In the accessory display section 44, a variable display of symbols is performed using winnings in the through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the through gate 41 are displayed. This is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 41 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display section 44 and a variable display is performed. After this is stopped, the state shifts to the open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a symbol, which is a type of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 51 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

A first reserved light emitting section 54 and a second reserved light emitting section 55 corresponding to the main display section 43 are provided in the lower part of the main display section 43 in the decorative member 47 . In the first holding light emitting unit 54, a plurality of light emitting units (more specifically, four) are arranged side by side, and the number of game balls that have entered the first operating port 38 is held up to a maximum of four, and the first holding light emitting unit The number of pending items is displayed by lighting the section 54. In the second holding light emitting unit 55, a plurality of light emitting units (more specifically, four) are arranged side by side, and the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 39 is held up to a maximum of four, and the second holding light emitting unit The number of pending items is displayed by lighting the section 55. Further, a third holding light emitting section 56 corresponding to the accessory display section 44 is provided in the lower part of the accessory display section 44 in the decorative member 47 . The number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 41 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the third holding light emitting section 56. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which some or all of the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 are displayed on a part of the symbol display device 51.

The accessory device 150 becomes open on the condition that a game ball enters either of the operation ports 38, 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and further enters a V winning hole provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192 to be described later, resulting in a jackpot state.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be explained in detail using FIGS. 6 to 9. 6(a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 6(b) is a plan view schematically showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the accessory device 150. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a rotating body unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150, and FIG. 9 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 180.

The accessory device 150 is roughly divided into an accessory unit 160 and a rotating body unit 180. As shown in FIG. 7, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 with screws. The base frame 161 is vertically divided by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and has an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating the base frame 161 in the front-rear direction.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

A pair of opening/closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 are provided on both left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161. A passage forming member 171 and a drive unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening/closing accessory drive units 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back side of the drive unit fixing plate 172. There is. One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive unit fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft of the opening/closing accessory 168. connected. Therefore, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened by driving the opening/closing accessory driving section 173.

To explain the opening operation in detail, each opening/closing accessory 168 stands upward when the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited), and the tip portions of each are close to both left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening/closing accessory 168 opens outward, and a game ball is placed between the tip of each opening/closing accessory 168 and both left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. A gap larger than one piece will be created. With this configuration, a game ball can enter the accessory device 150 only when each opening/closing accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is in an open state. Note that even when the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening/closing accessory 168 stands upward), the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited). (When the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened outward), it may be more difficult for the ball to enter the accessory device 150. The ball may be configured to be able to enter the object device 150. For example, when the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is being driven, the gap between the tip of the opening/closing accessory 168 and both left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is approximately the width of one game ball, and the opening/closing accessory driving section 173 is driven. A configuration in which the same gap becomes larger when driven is conceivable.

Further, the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is configured such that it cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine due to the passage forming member 171 and the drive unit fixing plate 172, and the back side of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is covered by a cover member 174. There is.

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The extending wall 175a formed at the upper part of the front frame 175 extends above the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the extending wall 175a allows the game ball to reach the ball receiving plate 163 in front. Jumping out is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 has a passage plate 177 that extends in the front-rear direction and connects to the ball receiving plate 163, and furthermore, a game ball passage 178 that extends in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the passage plate 177 (Fig. 6(b)). Since the passage board 177 is configured to be inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178 and further narrow in width toward the game ball passage 178, the game balls that reach the ball receiving plate 163 are It is guided to passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball path 178 flows down the game ball path 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178, and the game ball that enters the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179. As a result, entry of the game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. Note that the entrance sensor 179 is constituted by a well-known proximity sensor.

A rotating body unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be located below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 8, the rotating body unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

The guide passage forming member 181 has a downwardly recessed recess 182 formed approximately in the center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is symmetrical, and is inclined so that it becomes lower as it goes from the center on the back side to the center on the front side. The center of the guide passage 183 on the near side is located at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center of the back side of the guide path 183 is located vertically below the game ball path 178 of the accessory unit 160. A passage wall 183a forming the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage walls 183a, and a passage cover 184 extending horizontally is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. . However, an entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, so that only the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is exposed in plan view (see FIG. 9). Since this entrance opening 184a overlaps with the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game balls flowing down the game ball passage 178 reliably reach the center on the back side of the guide passage 183.

A ball distribution section 185 is formed at the center of the back side of the guide passage 183. The ball sorting section 185 has an inclined surface 185a that is inclined downward from the right side to the left side. The game balls that have reached the ball sorting section 185 are guided to the left guiding path 183 along the slope of the inclined surface 185a. Then, by rolling along the slope of the guide passage 183, it is guided to the front side of the guide passage 183. A lead-out portion 186 that is inclined toward the recess 182 is formed on the front side of the guide passage 183 .

A V-shaped prize opening 182a is formed in the bottom of the recess 182. The V winning hole 182a communicates with a V winning path 191a formed in the discharge path forming member 191, and the game ball that has entered the V winning hole 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning path 191a. In this case, a V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning path 191a, and the game ball passing through the V winning path 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

Furthermore, a release opening 182b is formed on the side surface of the recess 182. The removal opening 182b communicates with a removal passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game balls that have entered the removal opening 182b are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the removal passage 191b. In this case, the coming-off passage 191b is provided with a coming-off sensor 193, and the game ball passing through the coming-off passage 191b is detected by the coming-off sensor 193. In addition, the V winning sensor 192 and the losing sensor 193 are constituted by well-known proximity sensors. Furthermore, the game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the losing passage 191b are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 via a discharge passage (not shown).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the accessory device 150 is not provided with any discharge route other than the route passing through the V winning passage 191a or the losing passage 191b, and the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150 are not included in the prize. When being discharged to the outside of the device 150, it always passes through either the V winning passage 191a or the losing passage 191b.

A rotating body drive unit 194 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below, and an output shaft 194a extending in the vertical direction of the rotary body driving unit 194 is connected to the discharge passage forming member 191 and the guiding passage forming member 181. penetrates through. A rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. Note that the rotating body drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the recess 182 of the guide passage forming member 181 and is located within the recess 182 . The rotating body 201 rotates clockwise as the rotating body drive section 194 drives. Ten ball guide parts 202 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, and these ball guide parts 202 are lined up at equal intervals. Of these, nine ball guide portions 202 are bottomed exit opening guide portions 203, and one ball guide portion 202 is a bottomless V winning opening guide portion 204. The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined to become lower toward the outside. Each ball guide section 202 is large enough to accommodate one game ball, and a game ball led out from the lead-out section 186 of the guide path 183 enters one of the ball guide sections 202. In this case, the game ball that entered the V winning hole guide section 204 reaches the upper part of the V winning hole 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning hole 182a into the V winning path 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide section 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the outlet passage 191b from the outlet 182b.

Further, in this embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to detect the rotational position of the rotating body 201. The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other with a predetermined interval.One arm portion 196a is provided with a light emitting element, and the other arm portion 196b is provided with a light emitting element. Light receiving elements are arranged at opposing positions. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on a sensor board 197, and the sensor board 197 has a rotary body drive between both arm parts 196a and 196b (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element) of the rotational position detection sensor 196. It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that the cut bang 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is positioned.

The cut bun 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates as the output shaft 194a rotates. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut bang 198, and the light emitted from the light emitting element only occurs when the notch 198a passes between the arm parts 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates. The light reaches the light receiving element. By forming a notch 198a corresponding to the position of the V winning a prize opening guide part 204 on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element detects light from the light emitting element. , the rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning a prize opening guide part 204 passes in front of the lead-out part 186, the notch part 198a passes between both arm parts 196a and 196b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on one of the left and right sides of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the left side of the guide passage 183, which is the side where the removal opening 182b is formed. . The first distribution member 300 is disposed above the removal passage 191b as a bottom portion that constitutes a part of the floor of the guide passage 183. The first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and when the first distribution drive unit 300a is drive-controlled, the first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid). and a distribution state in which the rear end of the first distribution member 300 rotates downward using the rotation axis and slopes downward toward the removal passage 191b.

With the above configuration, when the first distribution drive section 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, the left side in the guide path 183 The distributed game balls pass over the first distribution member 300 using the first distribution member 300 as a floor section, and reach one of the ball guide sections 202 in the rotating body 201. On the other hand, the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven (excited state), and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, so that the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower removal passage 191b side. However, the game balls passing over this first distribution member 300 do not reach the rotary body 201 and are guided directly to the removal passage 191b. Therefore, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a warp passage 210 is provided that directly guides the game balls that have passed through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning passage 191a. The warp passage 210 includes a passage cover 211 having a substantially cylindrical shape, and a passage forming part 212 that divides the internal space of the passage cover 211 into a passage shape to form a spherical passage. The passage cover 211 is made of a transparent (translucent) synthetic resin, and a spiral passage 213 is formed inside thereof by the inner peripheral wall surface of the passage cover 211 and the passage forming part 212. . One game ball can pass through the spiral passage 213.

An entrance guide portion 215 is provided at the upper part of the passage cover 211 to guide the game balls that have passed through the game ball passage 178 to the spiral passage 213. The entrance guide portion 215 is disposed corresponding to a portion of the passage wall 183a of the guide passage 183 that is rearward of the ball distribution portion 185. Specifically, an opening (not shown) that opens toward the rear is formed in a portion of the passage wall 183a that is behind the ball sorting section 185, and the entrance guide section 215 is inserted into the opening. The entrance part is connected. The exit part of the entrance guide part 215 communicates with the spiral passage 213 through the warp entrance part 214 , and the floor surface of the entrance guide part 215 is sloped downward toward the spiral passage 213 .

A warp outlet 216 is formed at the lower part of the passage cover 211 for discharging the game balls that have passed through the spiral passage 213 to the outside of the passage cover 211. In front of the warp exit section 216, an exit guide section 217 is provided which extends forward in a downwardly inclined manner and guides the game balls discharged from the warp exit section 216 to the discharge passage forming member 191. ing. A V-guidance passage 260 for guiding game balls toward the V-winning passage 191a is formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and an exit portion of the exit guide portion 217 is formed at the rear end portion 261 of the V-guidance passage 260. are communicating. The V-guidance passage 260 is formed to slope downward toward the V-winning passage 191a, and a front end 262 of the V-guidance passage 260 communicates with the V-winning passage 191a. The warp entrance section 214, the entrance guide section 215, the warp exit section 216, the exit guide section 217, and the V guide passage 260 are each configured to allow one game ball to pass through.

With the above configuration, when the game ball that has reached the guide path 183 is guided to the warp path 210 side, it passes through the spiral path 213 in the warp path 210 and is guided to the V-guide path 260. Then, the game ball passes through the V guide path 260, enters the V winning path 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (wins a V prize).

Here, in front of the entrance guide part 215 in the warp passage 210, the game balls that have passed through the game ball passage 178 are placed on the entrance guide part 215 (warp passage 210) side and the ball distribution part 185 (left guidance passage 183). A second distribution member 310 is provided that can distribute the distribution to either side. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive section 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and when the second distribution drive section 310a is drive-controlled, the second distribution member 310 is moved in front of the entrance guide section 215. The state switches between a non-distributed state in which the gates are disposed, and a distributed state in which they are disposed above the entrance guide portion 215 and not in front of the entrance guide portion 215.

Furthermore, a shutter 221 for switching whether or not game balls can flow into the warp entrance section 214 is provided at an intermediate position of the entrance guide section 215 between the second distribution member 310 and the warp entrance section 214 of the warp passage 210. It is provided. The shutter 221 is connected to a shutter drive section 221a (electromagnetic solenoid), and when the shutter drive section 221a is drive-controlled, it is disposed in front of the entrance guide section 215 and is placed in front of the warp entrance section 215. There is a closed state that restricts the inflow of game balls into the warp entrance section 214 (closes the warp entrance section 214), and a closed state that is arranged above it and allows the inflow of game balls into the warp entrance section 214 (closes the warp entrance section 214). open state) and switch to open state.

With the above configuration, when the second distribution drive section 310a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, the game balls are transferred to the entrance guide section 215. After being distributed to the ball distribution section 185 side, the balls go down the left guide path 183. On the other hand, when the second distribution drive section 310a is driven (excited state) and the second distribution member 310 enters the distribution state, the game balls can flow into the entrance guide section 215, It is distributed to the guide section 215 side.

At that time, if the shutter drive section 221a is driven (excited state) and the shutter 221 is in the open state, the game ball on the entrance guide section 215 passes through the warp entrance section 214 and enters the spiral path. 213, and is led out to the V winning passage 191a through the exit guide part 217 and the V guiding passage 260. In other words, the player directly wins the V prize without going through the distribution by the rotating body 201. Conversely, if the shutter drive part 221a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, the game ball stops by coming into contact with the shutter 221, and the warp entrance part 214 The influx of game balls into the area is regulated. This state continues until the shutter 221 is opened, and game balls are stored in the accessory device 150.

Here, both the second distribution member 310 and the rotating body 201 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but the second distribution member 310 is disposed behind the rotating body 201, and The visibility from the rotating body 201 is lower than that of the rotating body 201. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second distribution member 310 from being targeted at the timing of distribution to the entrance guide portion 215 side. On the other hand, regarding the rotating body 201, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are sorted, increase interest in the rotating body 201, and improve its presence.

In addition, the ball distribution part 185 at the center of the back side of the guide path 183 has a downwardly inclined surface toward the rear so that it can not only guide the game balls to the left side but also distribute them to the rear. At this time, the second distribution member 310 in the non-distribution state is set in a positional relationship with the downward slope so that it is located on the near side (front) of the downward slope. Thereby, the second distribution member 310 in the non-distribution state suppresses the occurrence of a phenomenon in which the game ball remains in the middle of the downward slope.

In this embodiment, the period until the game balls stored in front of the warp entrance section 214 pass through the warp passage 210 (spiral passage 213) and reach the V winning sensor 192 is approximately 2 seconds. The path length is set to . In addition, the path length and the rotational speed of the rotating body 201 are set so that the period for the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 to reach the V winning sensor 192 via the left guiding path 183 and the rotating body 201 is approximately 3 seconds. is set. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the exit opening 182b is located closer to the lead-out portion 186 than the V winning opening 182a when viewed in the rotation direction (clockwise) of the rotating body 201. For this reason, the period until the game ball that has won in the accessory device 150 passes through the left guide path 183 and the rotating body 201 and reaches the sensor 193 for dislodging (until it is ejected from the accessory device 150 after passing through the sensor 193 for dislodging) period) is shorter than the period until it reaches the V winning sensor 192 via the left guiding path 183 and the rotating body 201.

The game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game balls flowing down the game ball path 178 arrive on the ball distribution section 185 formed at the center of the back side of the guide path 183. Then, on the condition that the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, it is distributed to the left guide path 183. Thereafter, it is guided to the lead-out portion 186 by rolling through the left-hand guide path 183. The game ball guided to the lead-out portion 186 is guided into the recess 182 by rolling along the slope of the lead-out portion 186. However, the game ball rolling in the left guide path 183 can reach the recess 182 only if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state. In other words, the game ball guided to the left guiding passage 183 may be guided to the recess 182 side, or may be directly guided to the exit port 182b.

A rotating body 201 is rotating within the recess 182, and the game ball guided into the recess 182 and entering the outlet guide portion 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the missing sensor 193. On the other hand, the game ball guided into the recess 182 and entered into the V winning hole guide section 204 is guided to the V winning hole 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

If the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state when the game balls reach the ball distribution section 185 described above, they are distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. In this embodiment, when a game ball reaches the ball distribution section 185 while the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the ball is always distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. The shape of the distribution section 185 is set. When the game ball is sorted to the entrance guide section 215 side and the shutter 221 is in the closed state, as already explained, the game ball is played at the position of contact with the shutter 221 (upstream of the warp entrance section 214). The ball stops and is stored in the accessory device 150 in that state. Thereafter, when the shutter 221 is displaced to the open state, the game ball flows into the spiral passage 213 through the warp entrance section 214 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192.

Furthermore, among the 10 ball guides 202, only one V winning hole guiding section 204 exists, so that the game ball that enters the recess 182 of the accessory device 150 has a probability of 1/10 to enter the V winning hole 182a. It will be entered. In addition, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 71 by detecting game balls by the V winning sensor 192 and the losing sensor 193. Further, the movement of the game ball on the rotating body unit 180 can be viewed from the front of the game machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

However, the number of ball guiding parts 202 and the number of V winning opening guiding parts 204 are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, if one V winning opening guiding part 204 is provided for six ball guiding parts 202, one It may be configured to win a V prize with a probability of /6, or it may be configured to win a V prize with another probability.

The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc. and the drive units 173, 221a, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. in the accessory device 150 are connected to relays attached to the guide path forming member 181. It is connected to the terminal board 199. These signal lines are bundled together as a harness and connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the main control device detects the entry of a ball and controls the drive of the drive unit. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a part or all of these are performed by a production control device, which will be described later, which is a sub-side control device.

The symbol display device 51 provides notification that a game ball enters either of the operating ports 38 and 39 and the accessory device 150 becomes open, a notification that a game ball enters the accessory device 150, In addition to notifications during the normal gaming state, such as notification of the sorted results, notification of the distribution status by the rotating body 201, notification of the occurrence of a jackpot state by detecting a game ball with the V winning sensor 192, and notification of the jackpot state. It also notifies you of the current round performance and provides error notification if an abnormality is detected. Note that the content of these effects may be as long as the player can clearly understand the respective game situations.

Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the game board 24 is provided with a vibration detection sensor 240 and a magnet detection sensor 241 as abnormality detection means. The vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241 are installed around the accessory device 150. These detection sensors 240 and 241 are electrically connected to the main controller 81, and detect vibrations and magnets (magnetism) when operating power (operating voltage) is supplied from the main controller 81. The detection result is output to the main controller 81.

As already explained, in the accessory device 150, the distribution of prizes to V prizes is performed, so by giving vibration to the accessory device 150 or attracting the game balls with a magnet, the flow of the game balls is changed, and the game It is assumed that there is a fraudulent act in which the player attempts to guide the ball to the V winning hole guide section 204. On the other hand, by providing the detection sensors 240 and 241, it becomes possible to detect the fraudulent act if it occurs.

Note that the positions of the detection sensors 240 and 241 are arbitrary as long as they can detect vibrations and magnetism. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing fraudulent acts against the accessory device 150, it is preferable to arrange it closer to the accessory device 150.

The main control device 81 to which the detection sensors 240 and 241 are connected has a game stop function that stops the subsequent games when vibrations or magnets are detected by these detection sensors 240 and 241.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a performance control device 82 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is equipped with a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 83 consisting of, etc. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected inseparably by a box connecting portion 85 serving as a separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. Since these boxes are connected inseparably by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 is required to be destroyed or a portion thereof to be removed in order to open the internal space of the substrate box 83. A plurality of box coupling parts 85 are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in a non-releasable manner. The box cover is irreleasably coupled to the box cover. The joining process by the box joining unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after being released, it is possible to perform the release process again. That is, the joining process is performed by inserting a locking pawl into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box joining parts 85. When the board box 83 is opened in the event of a malfunction of the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the box joint part 85 into which the locking claw is inserted is connected to the other box joint part 85. Cut the connecting part and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when performing the joining process again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box joining part 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 83 that the board box 83 has been opened illegally.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pieces to be coupled 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the pieces to be coupled 87 connect the board box 83 and the mounting base. A join process is performed between the two.

Note that as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal is removed from the place where it is pasted, the adhesive layer of the seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving traces of it. Furthermore, the seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the above response is received. A configuration may also be adopted in which it is impossible to transmit waves.

The production control device 82 is equipped with a production control board that controls audio, lamp displays, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the production control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a dispensing mechanism section 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover part 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, production control device 82, etc. from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism section 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 94, and includes a tank 95 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a tank 95 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball stored in the tank 95. A dispensing device 96 for dispensing balls. The game balls put out by the payout device 96 are discharged onto the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, a back pack board 92a is installed in the payout mechanism section 92 (see FIG. 5). A main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 92a, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off by switching the power switch 92b.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the upper edge side, which is on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95, etc., an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time the game machine is lent out, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and when changing states such as opening/closing execution mode. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame are output to the management control device on the gaming parlor side. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power supply and firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 97 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 includes a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, and furthermore, the power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the launch handle 60. The power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a RAM erase switch 98a (see FIG. 5). This pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, so that even in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power is restored, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power outage. It has become. Therefore, if you operate only the power switch 92b to shut off the power, for example when a game parlor closes, the state before shutting off will be stored, but if you operate the power switch 92b while pressing the RAM erase switch 98a, When the power is turned on, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 10.

A main control device 81, a production control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as already explained, the back pack unit is provided on the back side of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism section including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power supply and a firing control unit. A device 98 is installed.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. Note that the board box housing the main control board 111 and the like in the main control device 81 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. . Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint (crimped part) that connects multiple case bodies that make up a board box inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the structure of a joint (crimped part) that requires the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that remains and leaves a trace of having been removed is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box can be considered.

The main control board 111 is equipped with an MPU 112 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and each may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 115 provided in the main control device 81 and a payout control device 97 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power outage monitoring board 115.

Furthermore, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. Various sensors include a first operation sensor 38a and a second operation sensor 39c that detect winnings to both operating ports 38 and 39, as well as a general winning hole as a winning detection sensor that detects winnings to other ball entry parts. A sensor 35a that detects winnings in 35, a sensor 41a that detects winnings in through gate 41, etc. are provided. Further, various sensors include an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a losing sensor 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, etc. in the accessory device 150. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196, the winning determination for each ball entering section (ball entering determination) is performed, and the position of the rotating body 201 is determined. Understand things. Furthermore, the MPU 112 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Furthermore, the various sensors include a vibration detection sensor 240 that detects vibrations and a magnet detection sensor 241 that detects magnets. The MPU 112 performs abnormality monitoring based on the detection results of these detection sensors 240 and 241.

A power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, etc. are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result in the winning ball entering section.

Various commands for performance are output to the performance control device 82. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Incidentally, the production control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 112, as various drive units, an electric accessory drive unit 39b, an opening/closing accessory drive unit 173, a first distribution drive unit 300a, a second distribution drive unit 310a, a shutter drive unit 221a, a rotation A body drive unit 194 and the like are connected. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a winning occurs in either of the actuating ports 38 and 39, or when the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode based on a winning in the V winning sensor 192, the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 of the accessory device 150 is activated. The opening/closing operation of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed under the control. Further, in these cases, the drive control of both distribution drive sections 300a and 310a or the drive control of the rotating body drive section 194 is carried out.

Further, when a winning lottery is performed based on winnings in both operating ports 38 and 39, display control of the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 112. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a, the display control of the accessory display section 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

The power outage monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and also monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The power outage monitoring board 115 determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 98 becomes less than 22 volts, and transmits the power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable) provided on the MPU 112 of the main control device 81. output to the interrupt terminal). As a result, the main controller 81 recognizes the occurrence of a power outage, immediately executes the NMI interrupt process, and further executes the power outage process based on this. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and firing control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply and firing control device 98 is responsible for controlling the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 53, and the game ball firing mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a ball feeder that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail. A solenoid is an electric actuator that fires the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34, and a drive signal is supplied from the power supply and the launch control device 98 to the solenoid, so that the game ball is fired. fired.

The production control device 82 includes a production control board 141 on which an MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 142, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 143. It has a built-in RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 142 drives and controls the various light emitting sections 54 to 56, 63 and the speaker section 64 based on commands received from the main control device 81. Furthermore, commands resulting from analysis of these commands are transmitted to the display control device 100. Incidentally, the production control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157 are mounted. It is equipped with

The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the production control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 155).

The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 152 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. It is.

The VDP 155 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 155 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 156 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 112 of main controller 81>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described using FIG. 11.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, display settings on the main display section 43, symbol display settings on the symbol display device 51, display settings on the accessory display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, there is a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, and a jackpot random number counter C1 used for determining the type of jackpot such as whether or not to open/close the opening/closing accessory 168. A type counter C2, and an opening type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to opening the opening/closing accessory 168 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to the open state based on the winning to the operating ports 38 and 39; A random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second actuating port 39 should be placed in the electric role release state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS is acquired information storage when a winning occurs in the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

The held ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE consisting of a holding area Ra for the first result display section and a holding area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter Numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and open type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored as pending information in one of the areas. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first to fourth areas, if winnings to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 occur multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 can be stored on hold. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 114b, and the total reservation number storage area stores the number of winning history of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 43, and when starting one game round, the execution area AE Judgments are made based on various numerical information stored in the .

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 38, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 39, the second result is stored in the RAM 114. It is stored in the display section holding area Rb.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a result table (gaming result information group) in a result table storage area 113a serving as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the result table will be explained using FIG. 12(a).

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the result table has set as game results a miss result, a hit result, and a normal open result. The normal opening result is a game result that causes the opening/closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 to be in the open state (opening/closing execution mode) based on winnings in the operating ports 38 and 39. In this embodiment, when a winning occurs in the first operating port 38, the opening/closing accessory 168 becomes the open state once, and when a winning occurs in the second operating port 39, the opening/closing accessory 168 becomes the open state twice. It is set so that A missed result is a result in which the opening/closing accessory 168 does not become open even if a winning occurs in the actuating ports 38, 39. In this case, it is not possible to win the accessory device 150, and transition to the jackpot state (opening/closing execution mode) cannot be expected. A direct win result is a result of transitioning to a jackpot state (opening/closing execution mode) just by winning a prize in the operating ports 38, 39, and even if a winning in the accessory device 150 does not occur, as well as a V winning. , transition to the jackpot state as described above.

In addition, in the following, in order to distinguish between the opening/closing execution mode based on normal opening results and the opening/closing execution mode based on jackpot results (including both direct winning results and those due to the occurrence of V winnings), the former The latter is sometimes referred to as a "first opening/closing execution mode," and the latter is sometimes referred to as a "second opening/closing execution mode."

Of the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that will result in a miss is 1, the number of random number values that will be a direct hit is 1, and the rest are normal open results. It has a corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on winnings in both the operating ports 38 and 39, the number of opening/closing accessories 168 corresponding to the operating ports 38 and 39 are opened with a probability of 98/100, and 1/100. There is a probability of 1/100 that the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be opened, but the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will take place without a V winning, and with a probability of 1/100, the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be opened and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur. The transition will not take place either.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which no hit result or miss result is provided. However, by including these results, the games can be diversified, and especially if direct winning results are provided, it is possible to play games where winnings to the accessory device 150 do not occur frequently due to nail adjustments etc. Even with a gaming machine, it is possible to expect a jackpot situation, and even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the desire to play.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 38, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 39, the second result is stored in the RAM 114. It is stored in the display section holding area Rb.

The value of the random number that sets the type of jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in a various table storage area 113d as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the type table will be explained using FIG. 12(b).

As shown in FIG. 12(b), in the type table, a 16R (round) continuation mode and a continuation rate fluctuation mode are set as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate variation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game varies in the round game.

Here, the round game means that (1) the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened a predetermined upper limit number of times (in other words, the total opening time reaches the predetermined upper limit opening time); , (2) The total number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches a predetermined upper limit number. This is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened and closed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit number of prizes to be won in one round game is set to nine.

The maximum number of round games to be played in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 times regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, the 16 round game is set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variable mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is met. The continuation condition is that a game ball enters the accessory device 150 during the round game and that the game ball enters a V-win.

The open type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The release type counter CS is updated regularly. However, this update timing is set to be a different timing from the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, it is difficult to commit fraud by using some method to read the update timing of each counter value. The updated open type counter CS, like the other counters C1 and C2, is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 38, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and at the timing when the game ball enters the second operating port 39, the second result is stored in the RAM 114. It is stored in the display section holding area Rb.

The value of the random number that sets the waiting time (opening timing) from winning to the actuating ports 38, 39 to opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table in the opening timing table storage area 113c as a waiting information group storage means in the ROM 113. (Waiting period information group).

Here, the contents of the release timing table will be explained using FIG. 12(c).

As shown in FIG. 12(c), as the opening timing, a plurality of waiting times (standby periods) from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39 (or the closing timing of the previous opening/closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 types of standby time are set from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec in 0.1 sec increments. The interval between each of these times (0.1 sec) is set to be shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec cycle), and when a prize is won on the accessory device 150 by so-called stop hitting, etc. It has become difficult to intentionally change (increase) the probability.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is configured such that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 41.

Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to be in the open state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening/closing manner of the electric accessory 39a is set to remain the same regardless of the gaming state. That is, a state in which it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, or a state in which the open time or number of times when the electric accessory 39a is won is large (so-called high-frequency support mode), or a state in which the probability of winning in the open lottery is lower than that, or a state in which it is opened when the open lottery is won. A mode such as a state in which the time or number of openings is short (so-called low-frequency support mode) is not provided. If the configuration has these modes, the range of increase/decrease in the number of pitched balls can be large, so it is possible to improve the interest. Circumstances may arise where it is necessary to set the frequency of winnings to both operating ports 38 and 39 to be low. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, it is difficult for players to win at the operating ports 38 and 39, and there is a possibility that the player's desire to play the game may decrease. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to expect a certain amount of winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39 even in the normal gaming state. It is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation for playing games.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 112 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and NMI processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be explained first, and then main processing and normal processing will be explained.

<NMI interrupt processing>
First, the NMI interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13. This process is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and the MPU 112 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. . In the NMI interrupt processing, a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S100, and this processing ends. Thereafter, when it is confirmed that the power outage flag is set in normal processing, which will be described later, processing at the time of power outage is executed. This process will be explained later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 14. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In the following step S102, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S103, it is determined whether the game is in a state where the progress of the game is stopped (game stop state). The determination as to whether or not the game is in the game stop state is made on the condition that the game stop flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is determined that the game is in a stopped state, this timer interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in a stopped state, in step S104, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, 240, 241 are read, the states of these various detection sensors are determined, and the detection information is saved. do. In addition, when the winning of a game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the occurrence of prize balls, a prize control device is used to instruct the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize balls. Set the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects a winning in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command is set to instruct 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls.

In the following step S105, a winning process for a through game is executed in conjunction with winning the through gate 41. In the winning process for through, if a winning has occurred in the through gate 41, the number of accessory hold memories stored in the electric role hold area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4") Under this condition, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S102 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c. Further, the performance control device 82 executes a process for lighting up the third holding light emitting section 56 corresponding to the number of stored accessory objects.

In the following step S106, winning processing for the operating opening is executed. In the winning process for the operating opening, it is determined whether a game ball has won a prize in either of the operating openings 38, 39. If it is determined that a prize has been won, numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a. In addition, the details of the winning process for the operating port will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S107, abnormality monitoring processing is executed, and then the present timer interrupt processing is ended. In the abnormality monitoring process, the presence or absence of vibration detection or magnet detection is determined by referring to the detection results of the vibration detection sensor 240 and the magnet detection sensor 241, and the presence or absence of a residual ball abnormality in the accessory device 150 is determined. Note that details of the abnormality monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the winning process for the operating port in step S106 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 and 16.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 38 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls. In the subsequent step S203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming parlor side that the game ball has won in the first operating port 38. In step S204, the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first result display section holding area Ra is read, and the start pending storage number RaN stored in the first result display section holding area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). In the subsequent step S205, a process is executed to set the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 to one. Specifically, a process is executed in which an open number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "1". Thereafter, in step S206, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS, and the main prize winning process is ended.

If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first operating port 38, in step S207, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second operating port 39 (starting winning) or not. Judgment is made based on the detection state of the corresponding detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 39, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 97 to pay out seven game balls in step S208. In the subsequent step S209, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming parlor side that the game ball has won in the second operating port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second result display section holding area Rb is read, and the start pending storage number RbN stored in the second result display section holding area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the second start pending storage number RbN). In the subsequent step S211, a process is executed to set the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 to two. Specifically, the process of setting the above-mentioned open count counter to "2" is executed. In addition, even if the number of openings is set in the process of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be in the open state depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S206, and the main prize winning processing is ended.

On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, if the game ball does not win in either the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, the main winning process is directly ended.

The prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S208 above are transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process of step S603 in the normal process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S206 will be explained in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start hold memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S210 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). judge. If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is immediately terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the starting pending memory number N in the corresponding result display holding area is set in step S302. At the same time, the value stored in the total reservation number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in the above step S102, and the open type counter CS updated in the normal processing described later, are added to the empty space in the corresponding result display holding area. It is stored in the first storage area among the storage area areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages incremented by 1 in step S302.

In other words, when the start hold storage number RaN for the first actuation port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are set in the hold area RaN for the first actuation port. is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the reservation area Ra corresponding to the start reservation storage number RaN for the first operating port incremented by 1 in step S302.

In addition, when the start pending storage number RbN for the second operating port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are set in the holding area RbN for the second operating port. is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the reservation area Rb corresponding to the start reservation storage number RbN for the second operating port incremented by 1 in step S302. After executing the process of step S304, the information acquisition process ends.

Next, the abnormality monitoring process in step S107 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 240. If vibration is detected, a vibration detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S402. In the following step S403, the vibration detection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82. The vibration detection command is a command for making the production control device 82 recognize that the MPU 112 has specified the detection of vibration. The vibration detection command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in external output processing of normal processing to be described later. In the following step S404, an external output process for an abnormality is executed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming parlor side that the detection of vibration has been identified.

If vibration is not detected in step S401, or after executing the external output process for abnormality in step S404, it is determined in step S405 whether or not a magnet is detected by the magnet detection sensor 241. If a magnet is detected, the magnet detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S406, and the magnet detection command is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82 in the subsequent step S407. do. The magnet detection command is a command for making the production control device 82 recognize that the MPU 112 has specified the detection of the magnet. The magnet detection command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in external output processing of normal processing to be described later. In the following step S408, an external output process for an abnormality is executed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the detection of the magnet has been identified.

If the magnet is not detected in step S405, or after executing the external output process for abnormality in step S408, in step S409, whether or not the remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is determined. Determine whether The remaining ball flag indicates that a game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the existence of the game ball is confirmed even though the game ball should not exist in the accessory device 150. This is what is stored when the If the remaining ball flag is not stored, the abnormality monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, if the remaining ball flag is stored, a remaining detection command is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82 in step S410. The remaining detection command is a command for causing the production control device 82 to recognize that the MPU 112 has specified the detection of the remaining ball. The remaining detection command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output processing of the normal processing described later. In the subsequent step S411, an external output process for an abnormality is executed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the detection of a remaining ball has been identified, and the abnormality monitoring process is ended.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, in step S501, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 97) to become operational. In the following step S502, access to the RAM 114 is permitted.

Thereafter, in step S503, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 98a provided in the power supply and launch control device 98 is turned on, and in the subsequent step S504, whether the power outage flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is determined. Determine whether or not. If the power outage flag is stored, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S505, and in the following step S506, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power cut, that is, whether the RAM judgment value is stored or not is determined. Determine the validity of the collected data. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 114. Note that it is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 is correctly stored.

As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 98a. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed (YES in step S503), the process moves to steps S507 to S509. In addition, if the power outage flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 and the power cutoff occurrence information is not set (the result of step S504 is NO), or if the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) If an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed (the result of step S506 is NO), the process moves to steps S507 to S509.

In step S507, an initialization command is output to initialize the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 97). In the following step S508, the used area of the RAM 114 is cleared to 0, and in step S509, initialization processing of the RAM 114 is executed. Thereafter, in step S516, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 98a is not pressed, on the condition that the power outage flag is stored and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, in step S510, various types of RAM 114 are stored. Clear the power outage flag stored in the flag storage area 114e. In the subsequent step S511, a power recovery command is outputted to return the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 97) to the gaming state before the power was cut off.

In the subsequent step S512, it is determined whether or not an abnormality detection flag (vibration detection flag, magnet detection flag, remaining ball flag) is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If the abnormality detection flag is stored, the abnormality detection flag is cleared in step S513, and the abnormality detection state is released.

If the abnormality detection flag is not stored in step S512, or after the abnormality detection state is canceled in step S513, in step S514, it is determined whether the game stop state is set based on the game stop flag in the RAM 114. Determine.

If the game stop state is set, the game stop flag in the RAM 114 is cleared in step S515 to cancel the game stop state. Specifically, the firing stop process that prohibits the firing of game balls, the payout stop process that stops the payout device 96 from putting out game balls, etc. are canceled. Thereafter, in step S516, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later. This restores the state before the power was cut off. At this time, if vibration, magnet, residual ball detection, and game stop state settings were made before the power was cut off, the game returns with these settings canceled.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process from step S601 to step S610 is executed as a regular process at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update process at steps S612 and S613 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, first, a game stop determination process is executed in step S601. In the game stop determination process, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, the game stop process is executed. Details of the game stop processing will be described later.

In the subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is in a stopped state, and on the condition that the game is not in a stopped state, the processes of steps S603 to S609 are executed. In step S603, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is sent to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, if a production command, a vibration detection command, a magnet detection command, and a residual detection command are set, they are transmitted to the production control device 82.

Next, in step S604, the release type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the open type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S605, a game control process for advancing the game is executed. In the game control process, drive control (first opening/closing execution mode) of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39 is performed. After executing the game control process in step S605, the process advances to step S606, and a game state transition process is executed. This gaming state transition process causes the gaming state to transition to the second opening/closing execution mode. Details of the game control process in step S605 and the game state transition process in step S606 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S607, a remaining ball determination process is executed to identify the remaining state of game balls in the accessory device 150. In the remaining ball determination process, it is determined whether or not the winning game ball is not properly discharged from the accessory device 150 due to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and remains in the accessory device 150. . Details of the remaining ball determination process will be described later.

After step S607 is executed, in step S608, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 39a provided at the second operating port 39 is executed. In the electric role support process, an electric role opening lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric role model 39a using numerical information acquired from the electric role model release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114. At the same time, when the electric accessory open state is won, opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 39a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display section 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery results of the electric prize opening lottery.

After that, in step S609, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

If it is determined in step S602 that the game is in a stopped state, or after executing the game ball launch control process in step S609, in step S610, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Determine.

If the power outage flag is not stored, in step S611 it is determined whether the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Determine whether Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the release type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S612 and S613). That is, in step S612, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S613, the open type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process from step S601 to step S609 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The release type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that the power outage flag is stored, this means that the power has been cut off due to a power outage, so the power outage processing from step S614 onwards is executed. That is, in step S614, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited, and then, in step S615, a power outage command indicating that the power has been cut off is output to the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 97).

After calculating and storing the RAM judgment value in step S616 and prohibiting access to the RAM 114 in step S617, the infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, the power for data storage retention of the RAM 114 (power at the time of power cut) is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 98, so the information stored in the RAM 114 before the power is cut off is It is kept as it is for a predetermined period (for example, one or two days).

<Game stop determination process>
Next, the game stop determination process in step S601 in the normal process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20.

In the game stop determination process, in each step S701 to S703, it is determined whether a vibration detection flag, a magnet detection flag, or a remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. Thereby, it is determined whether the vibration has been detected, whether the magnet has been detected, and whether the presence of the remaining sphere has been identified. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the game stop determination process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S701 to S703, the process advances to step S704. In step S704, a closing control process is executed to displace the electric accessory 39a and the accessory device 150 (opening/closing accessory 168) to a closed state. Thereby, when the electric accessory 39a or the accessory device 150 is open, it is forcibly closed.

In the subsequent step S705, a firing stop process is executed in which the firing permission signal to the power supply and firing control device 98 is switched to LOW level to prohibit firing of game balls, and further, in step S706, other canceling processes are executed. For example, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 97 to stop the payout device 96 from putting out game balls. In addition, a game stop command is output to the performance control device 82 to stop the performance display on the symbol display device 51. After executing step S706, in step S707, a game stop flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and a game stop state is set. After that, the main game stop determination process ends.

By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, an affirmative determination is made in both step S103 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and step S602 of the normal process (FIG. 19) that are executed thereafter. will be done. If an affirmative determination is made in those steps, the processing in steps S104 to S107 and the processing in steps S604 to S609 are skipped. These processes are essentially processes for advancing the game, and by skipping these processes, the progress of the game can be stopped.

Incidentally, even if the game is stopped, the process of updating the various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 continues without being skipped (steps S101 and S102 in FIG. 14 and step S612 in FIG. 19). , S613). This makes it possible to continue updating the various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 even when the game is in a stopped state. Note that this configuration is such that even if the RAM erase switch 98a is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the initialization of the various lottery counters C1, C2, CS, CINI, and C4 is not executed, or the game is stopped. It is more effective to apply this method to a configuration that does not require initialization of the RAM 114 when canceling the state.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process of step S605 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 27.

In the game control process, first in step S801, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the occurrence of a direct hit result or V winning) is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the second opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The second opening/closing execution mode flag indicates that the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the second opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later. It is erased when the second opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition process.

If it is in the second opening/closing execution mode, the processing after step S802, that is, the game start processing from step S803 to step S806, the game progress processing from step S808 to step S810, and the game ending processing from step S811 to S813. This game control process ends without executing any of the above. In other words, when the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the game starts (a win triggered by a winning at the operating ports 38, 38) regardless of whether or not a winning occurs at the operating ports 38, 39. (opening of device 150).

If the second opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S802 whether the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the normal opening result) is in execution. Specifically, it is determined whether the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The first opening/closing execution mode flag indicates that the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed. ), it is stored, and is deleted when the operation of accessory device 150 based on the result (including the standby period after closing) ends.

If the first opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to steps S803 to S806 for starting the game. In the game start process, first in step S803, it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39. Therefore, the game control process is ended as it is. If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S804, the data stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section or the reservation area Rb for the second result display section is set for lottery processing. The data setting process is executed, and further, in step S805, a validity judgment process is executed to judge the game result of the data set in the data setting process. After that, in step S806, a control start process for starting control of the accessory device 150 is executed, and then the present game control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S804, the propriety determination process in step S805, and the control start process in step S806 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In the data setting process, first in step S901, it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second result display section holding area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S902 to S907 is executed, and if the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0", executes data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S908 to S913.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common reservation number CRN is 1 or more, as already explained. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether the second start hold memory number RbN is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is If stored, the data stored in the second result display section holding area Rb is set for lottery processing, regardless of whether the first start holding storage number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, if the reservation information is stored in both the first result display section reservation area Ra and the second result display section reservation area Rb, the second result display section corresponding to the second operation port 39 Priority is given to the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb.

In the data setting process for the first result display section, first in step S902, the first start pending storage number RaN of the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In the following step S903, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. Thereafter, in step S904, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S905, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section holding area Ra. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and also clears the data stored in the second area → first area, The data in each area is shifted in the following order: 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on.

In the subsequent step S906, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is erased; if it is not stored, that state is maintained. The second result display section flag is used to specify which pending information in the first result display section holding area Ra or the second result display section holding area Rb corresponds to the object of the current validity judgment. This is the information.

In the subsequent step S907, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the production control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the holding area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the holding area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the first actuating port 38. A shift time command including information that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S907 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display on the first hold light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold items based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second result display section, first in step S908, the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In the following step S909, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. Thereafter, in step S910, the data stored in the first area of the second result display holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S911, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and also clears the data stored in the second area → first area, The data in each area is shifted in the following order: 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on.

In the subsequent step S912, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the subsequent step S913, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the production control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area of the ROM 113 that the holding area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the holding area Rb for the second result display section, that is, it corresponds to the second actuation port 39. A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S913 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display on the second hold light emitting unit 55 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold items based on the received shift command.

Next, the validity determination process in step S805 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a direct hit result by referring to the data (jackpot random number counter C1) shifted to the current execution area AE and the result table in the ROM 113. If it is a direct win result, the process advances to step S1102 and a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. The V winning flag originally indicates that the passing of a game ball has been detected by the V winning sensor 192, but here it functions as a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the second open execution mode. do.

In the following step S1103, a direct hit command is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82. Further, in step S1103, processing is executed to switch the display on the main display section 43 to a display corresponding to a direct hit. Thereafter, the truth/failure determination process ends.

The direct hit command set in step S1103 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The production control device 82 executes processing for the start production of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

If it is not a direct hit result in step S1101, the process advances to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a losing result by referring to the data (jackpot random number counter C1) shifted to the current execution area AE and the result table in the ROM 113. If it is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value set in the opening number counter in step S205 or step S211 in the winning process for the actuated opening (FIG. 15) is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S1106, the off command is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82. Furthermore, in step S1106, a process is executed to switch the display on the main display section 43 to a display corresponding to the result. Thereafter, the truth/failure determination process ends.

The off command set in step S1106 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The effect control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 will not be in the open state based on the received out-of-order command.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the result is not a failure, it means that the result of the current validity determination is a normal open result. In this case, in step S1107, the normal release command is set as the command to be sent to the production control device 82. Further, in step S1107, processing is executed to switch the display on the main display section 43 to a display corresponding to the normal open result. Thereafter, the truth/failure determination process ends.

The normal opening command set in step S1107 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The performance control device 82 executes processing for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in the open state based on the received normal open command. That is, in this embodiment, the result of the win/fail determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winnings in the operating ports 38 and 39.

Next, the control start process in step S806 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24.

In the control start process, first, in step S1201, a process is executed to determine the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 has been opened by referring to the number-of-opening counter in the RAM 114 described above. In the following step S1202, opening/closing timing setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 22), data related to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113 are used. With reference to and , the current opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set. Specifically, from this process, a numerical value corresponding to the number of seconds after which the opening/closing accessory 168 is to be brought into the open state (or whether to start drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive section 173) is read from the opening timing table, and the value is stored in the RAM 114. The information is input to the standby counter provided in the various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined period, and when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it becomes possible to know that it is time to open the opening/closing accessory 168.

In the subsequent step S1203, a first distribution setting process for setting the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 (see FIG. 8) is executed. In the first distribution setting process of step S1203, the first distribution member 300 maintains a non-distribution state (a state in which game balls are not distributed to the exit port 182b side) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. Set the above operation mode. That is, in this embodiment, when the first opening/closing execution mode is executed, all of the game balls that have entered the accessory device 150 and have been guided to the left guiding path 183 by the ball distribution section 185 have reached the rotating body 201. Become something to do. Note that this is not limited to this, and for example, the first distribution member 300 is set to the distribution state during a part of the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode, and the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the rotating body 201. It may be configured to provide an opportunity to be guided to the exit port 182b without reaching the exit port 182b.

Next, in step S1204, a second distribution setting process is executed to set the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 (see FIG. 8), and further, in step S1205, the shutter 221 (see FIG. 8) is executed. ) executes shutter setting processing for setting the operation mode. In the second distribution setting process of step S1204, the second distribution member 310 maintains a non-distribution state (a state in which game balls are not distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. The operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set. Further, in the shutter setting process of step S1205, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 maintains a closed state (a state in which the warp entrance section 214 is closed) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the first opening/closing execution mode, the route via the warp passage 210 is cut off, and the revolving lottery to determine whether or not a V prize is won is exclusively performed by the rotating body 201. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the route passing through the warp passage 210 is released during a part of the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode (the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, and the shutter 221 is in the distribution state). (in an open state), an opportunity may be provided for the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 to be guided to the V prize opening 182a without passing through the rotating body 201.

After step S1205 is executed, in step S1206, a rotating body setting process for setting the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is executed. In the rotating body setting process of step S1206, settings for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position (position where the V winning a prize opening guide section 204 faces the deriving section 186), and settings for returning the rotating body 201 to the initial position are performed. The rotation start timing for starting rotation, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 at which rotation has started, etc. are set. In the present embodiment, the rotary body 201 starts rotating from the initial position at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 that triggered the execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. After that, the operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so that the rotating body 201 continuously repeats one rotation every approximately 5 seconds until at least the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S1206, this control start process ends.

Returning to the description of the game control process in FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S802 that the first opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the end standby time has elapsed. The termination standby time is a period for waiting for the first opening/closing execution mode to end after opening/closing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is completed. Note that the process for setting the end standby time will be described later.

If the end standby time has not elapsed, the game progress processing of steps S808 to S810 is executed. In the game progress process, the process during control is executed in step S808, the process for the action part in the accessory is executed in step S809, the winning process is executed in the subsequent step S810, and then the game control process is ended. do.

First, the in-control process in step S808 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

In step S1301, it is determined whether it is time to open the opening/closing accessory 168. In this determination, by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S1202, it can be confirmed whether or not it is the opening timing. If it is determined in step S1301 that it is the opening timing, an opening control process is executed in step S1302. In this process, the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is drive-controlled to displace the opening/closing accessory 168 to the open state. Further, in step S1302, a process is executed to input a value corresponding to the current open period (uniformly 0.5 sec in this embodiment) into the open period counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The open period counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined period, and when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it becomes possible to know that it is time to close the opening/closing accessory 168.

Then, in the subsequent step S1303, a process of subtracting "1" from the open count counter of the RAM 114 is executed. In the following step S1304, it is determined whether or not this is the first opening in the first opening/closing execution mode by referring to the opening number counter in the RAM 114. If it is the first opening, in step S1305, the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and then this control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that this is not the first opening, that is, if this is the second opening in the two-time opening, the current control process is immediately terminated.

If it is determined in step S1301 that it is not the timing to open the opening/closing accessory 168, the process advances to step S1306. In step S1306, it is determined whether it is time to close the opening/closing accessory 168. In this process, it can be confirmed whether or not it is the closing timing by referring to the value of the open period counter input in step S1302. If it is determined in step S1306 that it is the closing timing, a closing control process is executed in step S1307. In this process, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state by ending the drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173.

In the following step S1308, it is determined whether the remaining number of releases is "0" with reference to the number of releases counter in the RAM 114. If it is "0", in step S1309, a process for setting the end standby time is executed.

As already explained, the end wait time is a period for waiting for the first opening/closing execution mode to end after opening/closing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is completed. The waiting time is set in consideration of the period until the winning game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. In this embodiment, the period for the winning game ball to reach the V winning sensor 192 via the left guiding path 183 and the rotary body 201 is set to about 3 seconds, and the waiting time is set at the end. The time is set to a longer predetermined period (uniformly 3.5 seconds in this embodiment). With such a configuration, even if the game ball wins just before the accessory device 150 closes, it is possible to expect a jackpot based on the V win.

In step S1309, a process is executed in which a value corresponding to 3.5 sec is input into the termination standby time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The termination wait time counter is updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 14) is executed, so when the termination wait time counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), the It becomes possible to know that the waiting time has passed.

If the number of openings is not "0" in step S1308, that is, if the second opening in the two-time opening remains, in step S1310, the waiting time (closed time). In the process of step S1310, a process is executed to input a value corresponding to the current standby time (uniformly 1 sec in this embodiment) into the standby time counter of the RAM 114.

If it is determined in step S1306 that it is not the closing timing, after executing the process of step S1309 or after executing the process of step S1310, the present control process ends.

Next, the processing for the action part within the accessory in step S809 in the game control processing (FIG. 21) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 26.

In step S1401, it is determined whether it is time for the first distribution member 300 to be displaced. If it is the displacement timing, first distribution control processing is executed in step S1402. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Moreover, when the first distribution drive section 300a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state.

If it is determined in step S1401 that it is not the timing to displace the first distribution member 300, or after the process of step S1402 is executed, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether it is time for the second distribution member 310 to be displaced. If it is the displacement timing, second distribution control processing is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the second distribution drive section 310a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state.

As already explained, in this embodiment, both the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are set to be maintained in the non-distribution state in the first opening/closing execution mode (Fig. 24 Steps S1203 and S1204) and the determinations in steps S1401 and S1403 in the first opening/closing execution mode are always negative, and the processes in steps S1402 and S1404 are not executed.

If it is determined in step S1403 that it is not the timing to displace the second distribution member 310, or after executing the process in step S1404, the process advances to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether it is time for the shutter 221 to be displaced. If it is the displacement timing, shutter control processing is executed in step S1406. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the shutter drive section 221a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Further, when the shutter drive section 221a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state.

Note that since the shutter 221 is also set to be maintained in the closed state in the first opening/closing execution mode (step S1205 in FIG. 24), a negative determination is always made in the determination in step S1405 in the first opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the process of step S1406 is not executed.

After executing step S1406, rotating body control processing is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the driving state of the rotary body drive unit 194 is controlled in order to drive and control the rotary body 201 according to the setting contents already described (step S1206 in FIG. 24). After executing step S1407, the processing for the action part within the accessory is ended.

Next, the winning process in step S810 in the game control process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27.

In step S1501, the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the prize in the accessory device 150. If a prize has been won, the winning command within the accessory is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S1502. The winning command within the accessory set in step S1502 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The production control device 82 notifies the accessory device 150 that a winning has occurred (notification to draw attention to the movement of the game ball in the accessory device 150) based on the received prize winning command within the accessory device 150. Execute the processing for

In the following step S1503, a process is executed in which the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is incremented by one. This remaining ball counter RPC is for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of game balls existing in the accessory device 150.

If it is determined in step S1501 that no winning has occurred in the accessory device 150, or after executing the process in step S1503, in step S1504, the V winning sensor 192 detects the passage of the game ball (the occurrence of a V winning). ) is detected. If the occurrence of a V win is detected, the V win flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1505. In the following step S1506, a process is executed in which the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is decremented by one. That is, if the occurrence of a V winning is detected in step S1504, in addition to the occurrence of a V winning, this also means that a game ball has been ejected from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC, the winning The number of game balls in the object device 150 is updated. After executing step S1506, the main winning process ends.

On the other hand, if the occurrence of a V winning is not detected in step S1504, it is determined in step S1507 whether the passage (missing) of the game ball is detected by the losing sensor 193. If a miss is detected, the process proceeds to step S1506, and a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by 1 is executed. In other words, even when a miss is detected, it is determined that the game ball has come off, and it also means that the game ball has been ejected from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC, the accessory device The number of game balls in 150 is updated. On the other hand, if a miss is not detected in step S1507, that is, if neither a V win nor a miss has been identified, the main prize winning process is ended without updating the remaining ball counter RPC.

Returning to the description of the game control process in FIG. 21, if it is determined in step S807 that the end standby time has elapsed, the process advances to step S811 and the game end process of steps S811 to S813 is executed. In addition, under the situation where the waiting time at the time of termination is not set, a negative determination is made in step S807, and the above-mentioned processing for game progress of steps S808 to S810 is executed.

In the game ending process, first, in step S811, a process is executed to clear the first opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S812, control termination processing is executed. In this process, a process for terminating the control of the accessory device 150 (first opening/closing execution mode) for one piece of pending information is performed. Specifically, it checks whether there is an error in each drive unit 173, 300a, 310a, 194, returns it to its initial position, and so on.

Next, in step S813, a control end command is set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82, and then the present game control process is ended. The control end command set in step S813 is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The performance control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is terminated based on the received control termination command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S606 in the normal process (FIG. 19) will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 28 to 35.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether the second opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result) is being executed. If the second opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S1602, and it is determined whether the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the normal opening result) is in execution. If the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the current game result corresponds to transition to the second opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If the V winning flag is not stored, the main game state transition process is immediately ended.

If the V winning flag is stored, a process to start the second opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S1604. In the start processing, the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the second opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the same area 114e. Further, in step S1604, an opening standby time (start standby period) is set for waiting without starting opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, opening standby time information previously stored in the ROM 113 is set in the standby time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

In the following step S1605, type determination processing is executed to determine the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, among the pending information stored in the current execution area AE, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type table in the ROM 113 is checked to determine whether the type of the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuous mode. It is determined whether it is in the continuous rate fluctuation mode.

In subsequent step S1606, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result of step S1605. If the 16R continuation mode is selected, a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1607. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to understand that the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode.

If the mode is not 16R continuation mode in step S1606, or after executing the process in step S1607, the process advances to step S1608. In step S1608, the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "15", and the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d is set to "19". . The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting how many times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened in one second opening/closing execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 is a counter for counting the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. This is a counter for counting.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first opening/closing execution mode when a direct hit or a V winning occurs corresponds to the first round game out of 16 round games, and corresponds to the round game from the second round onwards. The configuration is such that the second opening/closing execution mode is started. That is, the second round is the first round in the second opening/closing execution mode.

After executing step S1608, a rotating body setting process is executed in step S1609. In the rotating body setting process, settings are made to return the rotating body 201 to the initial position (the position where the V winning opening guide part 204 faces the deriving part 186), and the rotating body 201 starts rotating after returning to the initial position. The rotation start timing, the rotation speed of the rotating body 201 at which rotation has started, etc. are set. In this embodiment, the rotation from the initial position is started at the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed from the opening start timing, and then the rotation is performed once every about 5 sec at least in the second opening/closing execution mode. The operation mode of the rotating body 201 is set so that the operation is repeated continuously until the end of the operation.

In the following step S1610, an opening command is set. This set opening command is sent to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This opening command includes information as to whether the mode is 16R continuation mode or continuation rate variation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode on the symbol display device 51, and this determined display mode is outputted from the performance control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 based on the display content command received from the production control device 82 so that a display (for example, video display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

In the following step S1611, after executing the external signal setting process, the main game state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, if the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and a jackpot occurs at the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what I did.

On the other hand, if the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, and the process advances to step S1612. In step S1612, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, opening/closing processing is executed in step S1613.

Here, the opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the main opening/closing process is ended, while if it is not "0", it is determined in step S1702 whether or not a round game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a round flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The round flag is a flag indicating that a round game is being executed, and is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e at the start of the round game, and is erased at the end of the round game.

If it is determined in step S1702 that no round flag is stored and that a round game is not in progress, then in step S1703 it is determined whether the value of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is "0" or not. judge. The process of this step corresponds to the process of determining whether a closing time (waiting time) between round games, which will be described later, has elapsed.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening/closing process is ended, while if it is "0", the process advances to step S1704, and the setting process for each round is executed.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for each round, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether a continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the current opening/closing execution mode is the continuation rate variation mode, a process for determining the number of rounds is executed in step S1802. In this process, the number of the round set in the current round setting process in the opening/closing execution mode is grasped by referring to the value of the first round counter RC1. Then, in step S1803, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 31, the round pattern table defines opening and closing patterns for each round in the second opening and closing execution mode. A plurality of types of opening/closing patterns are set for the opening/closing accessory 168 for each round, and an opening/closing pattern A, an opening/closing pattern B, an opening/closing pattern C, and an opening/closing pattern D are set.

The specific opening/closing manner of each of the opening/closing patterns A to D is defined in the opening/closing pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113. As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(d), the opening/closing pattern table stores the opening/closing manner of the opening/closing accessory 168 in association with the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round game. The opening/closing pattern table shows round games in the first game section at the beginning (1st to 6th openings), the second game section at the middle (7th to 13th openings), and at the end (14th to 19th openings). The game is divided into three game periods (game periods) including a third game period (opening up to the first round), and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is defined for each game period.

For example, in the opening/closing pattern A, as shown in FIG. In the 7th to 13th openings (RC2 = 13 to 7) belonging to the game section, the ball is opened for 1.5 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds), and then closed for 0.5 seconds. (also referred to as opening/closing pattern P1). Also, in the 14th to 19th games (RC2=6 to 1) belonging to the third game section, the opening is performed for 0.5 seconds and then the opening is performed for 1.5 seconds (also referred to as opening/closing pattern P2). In the case of P1, it is relatively easy for the accessory device 150 to win a prize in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of P2, although it may occur, it is less likely to occur than in A1. In other words, the opening/closing pattern A is such that the game ball is likely to enter the accessory device 150 in the first game section and the second game section.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the opening/closing pattern B is set so that the second game section is the opening/closing pattern P1, and the first game section and the third game section are the opening/closing pattern P2. In other words, the opening/closing pattern B makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the second game section.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the opening/closing pattern C is set so that the first game section is the opening/closing pattern P1, and the second and third game sections are the opening/closing pattern P2. In other words, the opening/closing pattern C makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the first game section.

As shown in FIG. 32(d), the opening/closing pattern D is set so that the third game section is the opening/closing pattern P1, and the first game section and the second game section are the opening/closing pattern P2. In other words, the opening/closing pattern D makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the third game section.

Based on these, to explain the winning characteristics of each round game, as shown in FIG. The round game has the winning characteristic A in which the game ball easily enters the accessory device 150 in the 1st to 13th opening), and the round game in the 3rd to 7th rounds in which the opening/closing pattern B is set, This is a round game having winning characteristic B in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the second game section (7th to 13th opening). In addition, the round game from the 8th round to the 11th round in which the opening/closing pattern D is set has a winning characteristic that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the accessory device 150 in the 3rd game section (14th to 19th opening). In the 12th to 16th round games in which the opening/closing pattern C is set, the game ball is placed on the accessory device 150 in the first game section (1st to 6th opening). This is a round game having a winning characteristic C that makes it easy to win a prize.

Returning to the description of the setting process for each round (FIG. 30), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1803, a process for setting the corresponding round pattern (round opening/closing pattern) is executed in step S1804. Specifically, the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to each of the patterns A to D. For example, for opening/closing pattern A, the flag is stored in the corresponding area.

If the continuation flag is stored in step S1801, or after executing the process in step S1804, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, "9" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game, and in this embodiment, when nine game balls win in the accessory device 150 in one round game, the round game ends. . In the subsequent step S1806, a process of setting "19" to the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then, in step S1807, the round flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. After executing step S1807, this setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the opening/closing process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S1704, a setting process for each opening is executed in step S1705.

Specifically, in each release setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether a continuation flag is stored. This process is similar to the process in step S1801 above. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate variation mode is selected, the process advances to step S1902. In step S1902, the second round counter RC2 is checked to determine how many times in one round the opening/closing accessory 168 has been opened this time. Then, in step S1903, the opening/closing pattern table (FIGS. 32(a) to (d)) stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to, and in step S1904, the opening number determined in step S1902 is Opening/closing patterns P1 and P2 corresponding to the above are set.

In the following step S1905, the distribution pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to. Here, the distribution pattern table will be explained with reference to FIG. 34.

The distribution pattern tables include a first distribution pattern table for the first distribution member 300 (FIG. 34(a)) and a second distribution pattern table for the second distribution member 310 (FIG. 34(b)). ) is provided. First, the first distribution pattern table will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the first distribution pattern table stores the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 in association with the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round game. As in the case of the opening/closing pattern table (Figure 32), the first distribution pattern table is the same as the opening/closing pattern table (Figure 32). After dividing the game into three game sections: a second game section (opening) and a third game section at the final stage (opening from the 14th to the 19th time), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is determined for each game section. is stipulated.

In each opening of the first game section (1st to 6th time) and the third game section (14th time to 19th time), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern MA. The operation pattern MA shifts to the distributed state after a period TM1 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, shifts to the non-distributed state after a period TM2 (0.1 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

Further, in each opening of the second game section (7th to 13th), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern MB. The operation pattern MB shifts to the distributed state after a period TM3 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, shifts to the non-distributed state after a period TM4 (0.5 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

That is, in the second game section, the period during which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state is longer than in the first game section and the third game section. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left guide path 183 are easily distributed to the exit opening 182b by the first distribution member 300 in the second game section, and are difficult to reach the rotating body 201.

Next, the second distribution pattern table will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the second distribution pattern table stores the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in association with the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round game. As with the first distribution pattern table, the second distribution pattern table allows round games to be divided into the first game section in the beginning (opening from the first to the sixth time) and the first game section in the middle game (opening from the seventh to the 13th time). ) and the third game section at the final stage (opening from the 14th to the 19th time), and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is determined for each game section. It is stipulated.

In each opening of the first game section (first to sixth times), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA. The operation pattern SA shifts to the distributed state after a period TS1 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, shifts to the non-distributed state after a period TS2 (0.1 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

Further, in each opening of the second game section (7th to 13th time) and the third game section (14th time to 19th time), the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SB. The operation pattern SB shifts to the distributed state after a period TS3 (0.5 sec) from the start of opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, shifts to the non-distributed state after a period TS4 (0.3 sec) from that displacement, and then, The non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

That is, in the second game section and the third game section, the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is longer than in the first game section. For this reason, it is more likely that the winning balls will be distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side when the game balls win in the second and third game sections than when the game balls win in the accessory device 150 in the first game section. It becomes easy.

Here, in this embodiment, during the period when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the shutter 221 is operated so that the shutter 221 is in the closed state (the state in which the warp entrance section 214 is closed). The mode has been set. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 cannot pass through the warp passage 210 and are stored in the accessory device 150 as they are. Therefore, since the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set as described above, the game ball that has won a prize in the accessory device 150 will be opened for the 7th to 13th time (second game ball). section) and the 14th to 19th game section (third game section), the game is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150.

Next, distribution characteristics due to the combination of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the first game section (first to sixth openings), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SA, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA. The operation mode is set to the operation pattern MA. For this reason, the game balls won in the accessory device 150 in the first game section are less likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 and more likely to reach the rotating body 201.

In the second game section (7th to 13th opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SB, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern MB. . For this reason, the game balls won in the accessory device 150 in the second game section are likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 and difficult to reach the rotating body 201.

In the third game section (14th to 19th opening), the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is set to the operation pattern SA, and the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern MA. . For this reason, the game ball that won the accessory device 150 in the third game section is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150, and if it is not stored, it is likely to reach the rotating body 201.

The operation mode of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 is different from the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168, and is common to all rounds (2nd to 16th rounds). There is. That is, the operation mode of each distribution member 300, 310 is uniquely determined in each round.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for each release (FIG. 33), after referring to the distribution pattern table in step S1905, in step S1906, the operation pattern corresponding to the release number grasped in step S1902 is set for each distribution. Settings are made regarding the division members 300 and 310. Specifically, for the first distribution member 300, a value corresponding to the period TM1 (0.5 sec) is set in the first distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Regarding the second distribution member 310, a value corresponding to the period TS1 (0.5 sec) is set in the second distribution counter provided in the same area 114d. The first distribution counter and the second distribution counter are updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, so each of these counters is set to a predetermined value (for example, "0"). ), it becomes possible to grasp the displacement timing of each distribution member 300, 310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the continuation flag is stored, the process advances to step S1907, and the opening/closing pattern for the current round is set to P1. That is, in the case of the 16R continuous mode, an opening/closing pattern is set that has the longest opening time in all rounds (RC1) and all opening times (RC2). Therefore, in the 16R continuous mode, it is easy to win the maximum number of prizes in each round. In addition, in this embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the game continues to the next round even if the V prize is not won (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

In the following step S1908, the operation mode (distribution pattern) of each distribution member 300, 310 is set. Similar to the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the distribution pattern in the case of the 16R continuous mode is the same as the case of the first opening/closing execution mode. The operating modes of the dividing members 300 and 310 are set so that they are maintained in a non-distributing state.

After executing the process of step S1906 or after executing the process of step S1908, this setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the opening/closing process (FIG. 29), after the setting process for each opening is executed in step S1705, the opening process is executed in step S1706. Specifically, drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is started to bring the opening/closing accessory 168 into the open state. Then, in step S1707, an open command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set release command is sent to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This release command includes information on whether or not the mode is 16R continuous mode, as well as information on what round the release is being made (information on the first round counter RC1), and how many times the release is being made in one round (second round counter RC1 information). information on round counter RC2) and information on opening/closing patterns A to D. Based on the received opening command, the performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance that notifies the opening/closing pattern, the winning rate of the accessory device 150, etc., and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. control.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the round flag is stored and a round game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1708, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173. If the opening/closing accessory 168 is being opened or closed, an opening process is executed in step S1709, and then the main opening/closing process is ended.

Here, the open process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In the process during release, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter T is "0". The process of this step is the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168 per time, that is, the opening time set by the elapsed time from the start of opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 with reference to the opening/closing pattern table (FIG. 32). This is a process of determining whether the (upper limit opening time) has been reached.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0" and the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168 has not reached the upper limit opening time, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the prize in the accessory device 150. The determination is made based on the detection state of the entrance sensor 179. If no winning has occurred, the main opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is subtracted by "1" in step S2103, and then a process of incrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by 1 is executed in step S2104. After executing step S2104, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". If it is not "0" and the maximum number of winnings in one round (upper limit number of winnings) has not been reached, the main opening/closing process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the winning counter PC is "0" and the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 has reached the maximum winning number of one round, the process advances to step S2106. In step S2106, a process is executed to clear the second round counter RC2 to "0" in order to end the current round game.

Further, if the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S2101, that is, if the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168 has reached the upper limit opening time, the process advances to step S2107, and the second round counter RC2 is set. Execute the process of subtracting "1".

After step S2106 or step S2107 is executed, a closing process is executed in step S2108. In this process, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is ended, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is brought into the closed state. In the following step S2109, it is determined whether the second round counter RC2 is "0". If the second round counter RC2 is not "0", it means that there are remaining openings in the current round game. In this case, the process advances to step S2110, and the closing time between each opening (closing period, waiting period) Execute the setting process. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above-mentioned opening/closing pattern table (Fig. 32), the current closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped, and the processing corresponding to that time is determined. Input the numerical value to timer counter T.

On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is "0" in step S2109 and there is no remaining release, the process advances to step S2111, and processing for setting the end standby time is executed. The end wait time is for waiting for the end of the round game after the final opening and closing in the round game is completed. That is, in this embodiment, the time when the end waiting time has elapsed is the end time of the round game. Similar to the end standby time related to the first opening/closing execution mode (step S1309 in FIG. 25), the termination wait time takes into account the period until the winning game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. is set. That is, the predetermined period (in this embodiment, uniformly 3.5 seconds). Therefore, at the end of the round game, all of the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150, except for the game balls stored in the accessory device 150, have been discharged from the accessory device 150.

In step S2111, a process is executed in which a value corresponding to 3.5 sec is input into the termination standby time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The termination wait time counter is updated (decremented by 1) every time the timer interrupt process (Figure 14) is executed, so when the counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), the termination wait time is It becomes possible to understand what has passed.

In the following step S2112, a shutter setting process for setting the operation mode of the shutter 221 is executed. In this process, the shutter 221 is displaced from the closed state to the open state after a period TT1 (0 sec) has elapsed from the end timing of the round game, and returns to the closed state when a period TT2 (0.3 sec) has elapsed from that displacement. The operating mode of the shutter 221 is set as follows. In this embodiment, since the period TT1 is set to 0 sec, the shutter 221 is moved to the open state at the end timing of the round game. Further, except for the period during which the shutter 221 remains in the open state (period TT2), the shutter 221 is set to maintain the closed state during execution of the second opening/closing execution mode.

In step S2112, a value corresponding to the period TT1 is set in the shutter counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Since the shutter counter is updated (decremented by 1) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed, when the shutter counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), the displacement timing of the shutter 221 is determined. It becomes possible to understand.

After executing step S2110 or step S2112, a closing command is set in step S2113, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set closing command is sent to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This closing command includes information as to whether the current closing process corresponds to the end of one round or to each opening/closing process during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the opening/closing process (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S1708 that the opening/closing accessory 168 is not opening, that is, the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed, the process advances to step S1710, and the value of the timer counter T is It is determined whether or not is "0". The process of this step is a process of determining whether or not the closing time between openings set in step S2110 (FIG. 35) described above or the end standby time set in step S2111 described above has elapsed.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening/closing process is ended, while if it is "0", it is determined in step S1711 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "0". If the second round counter RC2 is not "0", it means that the closing time between the above openings has elapsed, and in this case, in order to execute the remaining openings in the current round game, the process from step S1705 onward is executed. Execute. On the other hand, if the second round counter RC2 is "0", this means that the end waiting time has elapsed, in other words, it is the end timing of the round game, and in this case, the process advances to step S1712. Executes round update processing. After that, the main opening/closing process ends.

Here, the round update process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

In the round update process, first in step S2201, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "1". The round update process is a process executed at the round end timing, and in step S2201, it is determined whether the current round end timing is the final round in the second opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "1" and corresponds to the end timing of a round game other than the final round, the process advances to step S2202, and whether the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 or not. Determine whether This process is similar to the process in step S1801 above. If the continuation flag is not stored, that is, if the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is the continuation variation mode, in step S2203, it is determined whether the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Determine whether That is, in step S2203, it is determined whether the continuation condition for the next round game is satisfied. If the V winning flag is stored and the above continuation condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S2204 and a process of clearing the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202 (if the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is the 16R continuous mode) or after executing the process in step S2204, the first round counter RC1 is set to "1" in step S2205. Update the round number by subtraction. In the following step S2206, processing for setting the closing time between each round (period of the round interval) is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) is input into the timer counter T. Regarding the closing time between each round set here, the elapsed timing can be grasped by executing the determination process of step S1703 (FIG. 29) in the next normal process (opening/closing process).

After executing step S2206, a round update command is set in step S2207. This set round update command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This round update command includes information such as the closing time between each round set in step S2206 and the number of rounds of the next round game (what number of round game it is). Based on the received round update command, the performance control device 82 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the end of the round game or the start of the next round, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "1" in the above step S2201 (when it is the end timing of the final round), or if the V winning flag is not stored in the above step S2203 (the continuation condition is If not established), the process advances to step S2208. In step S2208, a process is executed to clear the value of the first round counter RC1 to "0" in order to end the second opening/closing execution mode. In the following step S2209, ending start processing is executed. In the start process, a waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in waiting time counters provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed.

Thereafter, in step S2210, an ending command is set. This set ending command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in step S603 in the normal process (FIG. 19). This ending command includes information such as the waiting time for the ending set in step S2209, the type of the second opening/closing execution mode, and the number of times the round game continues. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode on the symbol display device 51, and this determined display mode is outputted from the performance control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 based on the display content command received from the production control device 82 so that a display (for example, video display) corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode is performed.

After executing step S2207 or after executing step S2210, the process advances to step S2211 to execute a process of clearing the round flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and then ends this round update process.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the opening/closing process in step S1613, the process for the action part within the accessory is executed in step S1614. Since the process of this step is similar to the process for the action part in the accessory shown in FIG. 26, it will be explained with reference to the same figure.

In step S1614, the processing for the accessory motion part, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the first distribution counter set in step S1906 (FIG. 33). Then, when the first distribution counter is a predetermined value (for example, "0"), that is, when it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1402.

In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Moreover, when the first distribution drive section 300a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When set to the distribution state, a value corresponding to the maintenance period TM2 (0.5 sec or 0.1 sec) of the distribution state is input to the first distribution counter.

If it is determined in step S1401 that it is not the timing to displace the first distribution member 300, or after the process of step S1402 is executed, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether it is time for the second distribution member 310 to be displaced. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the second distribution counter set in step S1906 above. If it is the displacement timing, a second distribution control process is executed in step S1404. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. Further, when the second distribution drive section 310a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the distribution state maintenance period TS2 (0.3 sec or 0.1 sec) is input into the second distribution counter.

If it is determined in step S1403 that it is not the timing to displace the second distribution member 310, or after executing the process in step S1404, the process advances to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether it is time for the shutter 221 to be displaced. This determination can be made by referring to the value of the shutter counter set in step S2112 (FIG. 35). If it is the displacement timing, shutter control processing is executed in step S1406. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the shutter drive section 221a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the shutter drive unit 221a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is ended and the shutter 221 is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Further, when the shutter drive section 221a is not in the driving state, it starts driving and displaces the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. When the open state is set, a value corresponding to the open state maintenance period TT2 (0.3 sec) is input to the shutter counter.

If it is determined in step S1405 that it is not the displacement timing of the shutter 221, or after the process in step S1406 is executed, a rotating body control process is executed in step S1407. In the process of step S1407, the driving state of the rotating body drive section 194 is controlled in order to drive and control the rotating body 201 according to the settings set in the rotating body setting process (FIG. 28) of step S1609. After executing step S1407, the processing for the action part within the accessory is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the process for the action part within the accessory in step S1614, in step S1615, the presence or absence of a V win and the discharge of the game ball from the accessory device 150 are determined. Execute the process for passing through the accessory to understand it.

Here, the process for passing through the accessory will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

In the process for passing through the accessory, first in step S2301, it is determined whether the passage of the game ball (occurrence of V winning) is detected by the V winning sensor 192. If the occurrence of a V win is detected, the V win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2302. In the following step S2303, a process is executed in which the remaining ball counter RPC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is decremented by 1. That is, if the occurrence of a V winning is detected in step S2303, it means that in addition to the occurrence of a V winning, a game ball has been ejected from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC, the winning The number of game balls in the object device 150 is updated. After executing step S2303, the process for passing through the accessory is ended.

On the other hand, if the occurrence of a V winning is not detected in step S2301, it is determined in step S2304 whether the passage (missing) of a game ball is detected by the losing sensor 193. If a miss is detected, the process proceeds to step S2303, where a process of decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC by 1 is executed. In other words, even when a miss is detected, it is determined that the game ball has come off, and it also means that the game ball has been ejected from the accessory device 150. Therefore, by decrementing the remaining ball counter RPC, the accessory device The number of game balls in 150 is updated. On the other hand, if a miss is not detected in step S2304, that is, if neither a V win nor a miss has been identified, the process for passing through the official object is ended without updating the remaining ball counter RPC. .

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the process of step S1615, it is determined in step S1616 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S1617 It is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1618, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In this process, a process is performed to return the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state). For example, the distribution members 300 and 310, the shutter 221, and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at initial positions.

Note that the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening/closing mode becomes easier to win into the second operating port 39 than in other states). or a gaming state in which the type and probability of the gaming result when a prize is won to the actuating ports 38, 39 changes (for example, the probability of a direct winning result changes), etc., when the above opening/closing execution mode ends. It is preferable to configure such a configuration that these gaming states are set in the transition process.

After the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S1618 is completed, the opening/closing execution mode ending process is executed in step S1619, and then the main gaming state transition process is ended. In the process of ending the opening/closing execution mode, the continuation flag and the like used during the opening/closing execution mode are erased. Further, in step S1619, information indicating that the first opening/closing execution mode has ended is outputted to the outside by, for example, stopping the jackpot signal outputted in step S1611. This allows the hall computer (management control device) of the gaming hall to grasp the start and end of one opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the remaining ball determination process in step S607 in the normal process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 38.

In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114.

If the first opening/closing execution mode flag is stored and the first opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the termination standby time set in step S1309 (FIG. 25) has elapsed. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the end standby time counter is a predetermined value (for example, "0").

If the standby time at the end has not elapsed, this remaining ball determination process is ended, while if the standby time at the end has elapsed, the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" in step S2403. Determine whether or not. If the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0" and the number of winning balls into the accessory device 150 and the number of balls discharged from the accessory device 150 do not match, the process advances to step S2404, and the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are stored. Stores the remaining ball flag. The remaining ball flag is a flag indicating that game balls remain in the accessory device 150. When the remaining ball flag is stored in this way, the abnormality monitoring process (FIG. 17) in step S107 in the timer interrupt process determines that there are remaining game balls, and the game stop determination process (FIG. 17) in step S601 in the normal process 20), the game enters the stopped state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", it is assumed that no game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and the main remaining ball determination process is immediately terminated. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the first opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S2405, and it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the second opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114.

If the second opening/closing execution mode flag is stored and the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2405 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the process advances to step S2407, and it is determined whether the ending has ended (whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed). If the ending has ended, that is, if it is the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, the process advances to step S2403, and it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" and the remaining ball is Execute judgment. Note that if a negative determination is made in any of steps S2405 to S2407, this remaining ball determination process ends.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 39. Here, the description will proceed assuming that the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is the continuous fluctuation mode. In addition, in FIG. 39, the numbers in square brackets indicate the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 in one round game. For example, [1] in the second round game means the first opening in the round game.

When the second round game (the first round round game in the second opening/closing execution mode) is started at timing t1, the first opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started (FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b) )). In the second round of the round game, since the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening/closing pattern A (see FIG. 31), the open state of the opening/closing accessory 168 is maintained for 1.5 seconds from timing t1 (see FIG. 32). This is maintained until timing t3 when reference a)) has elapsed. At timing t3, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, and this state is maintained until timing t4, which is 0.5 seconds later.

Further, when the first opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 is controlled based on the start timing (timing t1) (FIG. 39(d)). During the first to sixth releases (first game section), the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is set to the operation pattern SA (see FIG. 34(b)), so 0.5 sec from timing t1 At the elapsed timing t2, the second distribution member 310 switches from the non-distribution state (the state in which game balls are distributed to the ball distribution section 185 side) to the distribution state (the state in which game balls are distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side). It will be done. When the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is operation pattern SA, the distribution state is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Note that the operation mode of the first distribution member 300 is also controlled based on the opening start timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, but this is not shown for convenience.

After that, for example, at timing t5, which is the middle timing of the second release, a game ball enters the prize in the accessory device 150 while the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state (strictly speaking, When the winning game ball reaches the second distribution member 310), the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39(c) and 39(d)). At this time, the shutter 221 disposed in front of the warp entrance section 214 is in a closed state to close the warp entrance section 214 (FIG. 39(e)). Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are stored in the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp entrance section 214.

Thereafter, another winning ball that is distributed to the ball distribution section 185 side by the second distribution member 310 and headed toward the rotary body 201 through the left-side guidance path 183 is, for example, at timing t6, which is the middle timing of the fifth release. When the rotating body 201 distributes the winnings to the V winning hole guide section 204 and passes through the V winning hole 182a, it is detected by the V winning sensor 192, and the V winning flag is turned on (stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114). state) (Fig. 39(g)). As a result, the round continuation condition is satisfied, and the execution of the third round game (next round game) is confirmed.

At timing t7, which is the middle timing of the 14th opening, when a game ball enters the accessory device 150 while the second distribution member 310 is being switched to the distribution state, the game ball is transferred to the second distribution member. 310, it is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. However, since game balls are already stored, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side are bounced by the stored game balls and distributed to the guide path 183 side. In this way, even if a plurality of game balls are distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side at a good timing, the number of game balls stored is limited to one.

At subsequent timing t8, when the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches nine, which is the upper limit number of winnings per round, the opening and closing accessory 168 in the second round of the round game ends, The opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state. Thereafter, the end of the round game is awaited with the opening/closing accessory 168 in the closed state, and this state lasts from the closing timing (timing t7) of the opening/closing accessory 168 until the timing t9 when the end waiting time (3.5 sec) has elapsed. maintained.

As already explained, the end standby time is set in consideration of the period until the winning game ball is discharged from the accessory device 150. Therefore, the second round game ends in a state in which all of the winning game balls from the accessory device 150 are discharged, except for the game balls stored in front of the warp entrance section 214. Therefore, it is avoided that the round game ends before the last winning ball passes through either the V winning hole 182a or the losing hole 182b (before the result for the last winning ball is determined). For this reason, when the number of winning game balls in the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number of winning balls per round, the continuation condition (condition for implementing the third round round game) is established without any V winnings occurring. Even if it is not, the continuation condition can be satisfied when the last winning ball passes through the V winning ball. Therefore, it is possible to expect the continuation condition to hold until the last winning ball is ejected.

Note that if the game ball passes the V winning sensor 192 after the end waiting time has elapsed, it will not be treated as a V winning and the continuation condition will not be satisfied. In other words, a V winning occurs only when the game ball passes the V winning sensor 192 before the end waiting time elapses. In this sense, the waiting time at the end can also be said to be the validity period of the V winning prize.

When the second round game ends at timing t9, the start of the third round game is awaited with the opening/closing accessory 168 in the closed state. This state is maintained from timing t9 until the waiting time (1.5 sec) between rounds has elapsed.

Furthermore, at timing t9, the shutter 221 disposed in front of the warp entrance section 214 is switched from the closed state that closes the warp entrance section 214 to the open state that opens the warp entrance section 214 (FIG. 39). e)). As a result, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 at the entrance guide section 215 advance to the warp entrance section 214 and enter the warp passage 210. The game ball that has entered the warp passage 210 goes down the spiral passage 213, is guided to the V guidance passage 260 through the warp exit part 216 and the exit guide part 217, and is guided to the V winning passage 191a (V winning sensor 192). It will be destroyed.

As already explained, it takes about 2 seconds for the game balls stored in front of the warp entrance section 214 to pass through the warp passage 210 and reach the V winning sensor 192. Therefore, the game balls whose storage is released at timing t9 reach the V winning sensor 192 after the waiting period (1.5 sec) provided between the second and third rounds has elapsed.

At timing t10 when the waiting period has elapsed, the third round of the game is started, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened for the first time (FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b)). In the third round of the round game, the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled by the opening/closing pattern B (see FIG. 31), so the opening/closing accessory 168 remains open for 1.5 seconds from timing t3 (see FIG. 32). (see b)) continues until the period has elapsed.

At timing t11, which is delayed by about 0.5 sec from timing t10, the game ball flowing down the warp passage 210 reaches the V winning sensor 192. As described above, this game ball is a game ball that is stored in the accessory device 150 during the second round game and is released from storage at the end of the round game. That is, the game balls stored in the second round game pass the V winning sensor 192 at a timing after the start of the third round game and before the end of the third round game. As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the third round game, and the execution of the fourth round game is confirmed (FIG. 39(g)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 in the second round of the round game straddles the round game without being discharged from the accessory device 150, and is used for the third round of the round game. Passes the V winning sensor 192 in the game (V winning). In other words, the game ball that won the prize in the accessory device 150 in the second round game can be played not only in the next round game, the third round game, but also in the fourth round game, which is the next round game. This will also affect the implementation of the Therefore, while playing the second round game, the player can play with the aim of playing the fourth round game.

Incidentally, if no accumulation occurs in the second round game, even if the accumulation is released, the above-mentioned V winning won by the accumulated balls will not occur. In this case, in the third round of the round game, if a V prize is won through the distribution by the rotating body 201, the fourth round of the round game will be executed.

Here, focusing on the method for implementing the fourth round game, the game ball is stored in the second round game, and the V winning is achieved by the route of the rotating body 201 in the third round game. There are two ways to do this: to generate one. In other words, the opportunity to acquire the right to implement the fourth round can be given not only in the third round but also in the second round. This makes it possible to provide a period during which players can play the game with the aim of playing the fourth round over a plurality of rounds, such as the second and third rounds, and it is possible to maintain expectations for the continuation of the rounds for a long time.

In addition, even if you are unable to store winning balls in the second round, if the winning game ball in the third round passes V in that round, you can achieve the fourth round. The second round can be positioned as a retry round. As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the fourth round is likely to be held, and it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play.

At this time, in this embodiment, the stored game balls are configured to pass through the warp passage 210 and always reach the V winning sensor 192, so if storage can be achieved, the V Your chances of winning a prize will be greatly increased. Therefore, not only can the player strongly arouse a sense of expectation that the game balls will be stored, but also it becomes possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind when the game balls are stored. In addition, the number of game balls required to be stored can be kept small, which ultimately contributes to reducing the size of the storage area within the accessory device 150. Inside the accessory device 150, a large number of game parts are installed, such as a guide passage 183 that serves as a flow path for game balls, and a rotary body 201 for distributing game balls, and it is necessary to balance these parts when securing a storage area. Be strong. Therefore, by reducing the size of the storage area, it becomes possible to simplify the design of accessories.

On the other hand, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is shorter than the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state. The probability of being distributed to the guide section 215 side is lower than the probability of being distributed to the ball distribution section 185 side. This prevents the game from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, even if a V winning occurs, until the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit number of openings or the total number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit, the round will not be played. The game continues. With such a configuration, even though the game balls that have been released from storage are configured to win V prizes early in the round game, it is possible to play the game aiming to win up to the upper limit number. Not only that, but it is also possible to appropriately secure a period for playing games with the aim of making new savings.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the storage is released before the start of the third round game, and at the start of the round game, the game ball storage area (entrance guide part 215) in the accessory device 150 is closed. It is vacant. Therefore, new accumulation can be expected from the beginning of the round game. For example, in a configuration where storage is released in the middle of a round game, the goal is to generate storage in the remaining time, but according to this embodiment, the entire round game is used to generate storage. It becomes possible to aim for occurrence.

It is also conceivable that the distance between the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 is twice or more the diameter of the game ball, so that a plurality of game balls can be stored. In this case, if the number of stored balls is less than the upper limit, new game balls can be stored without canceling the storage, so even if the storage is canceled in the middle of a round game, new game balls can be stored from the beginning of the round game. It becomes possible to predict the occurrence. However, in addition to complicating the design of accessories due to the expansion of the storage area, it is necessary to devise a method to prevent new storage balls from being released at the same time when storage is released. Considering these, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of this embodiment.

Moreover, the storage release of the game balls stored in the second round is executed before the second distribution member 310 is first switched to the distribution state in the third round. In this case, after securing a space in the storage area, the game balls can be distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. This suppresses the inconvenience that even though the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150 can be directed toward the entrance guide section 215, the storage is obstructed by the game balls that have already been stored. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the storage release of the stored game balls is not performed under the situation where the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, but is configured to be performed under the situation where it is in the closed state. When the accessory device 150 is in an open state in which a game ball is likely to win, the player's consciousness tends to be focused on whether or not the game ball will win. Therefore, if the storage is released in an open state, there is a risk that the player may miss the release of the storage. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the storage is released under the closed state in which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win, it is possible to prevent the player from missing out.

After the above, for example, at timing t12, which is the middle timing of the third release, if a game ball enters the accessory device 150 while the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state, the game ball The balls are distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 (FIGS. 39(c) and 39(d)). At this time, the shutter 221 disposed in front of the warp entrance section 214 is in a closed state to close the warp entrance section 214 (FIG. 39(e)). Therefore, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 will be stored within the accessory device 150 without reaching the warp entrance section 214.

Then, when the third round game ends at timing t13, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state (FIG. 39(e)), and the storage is released. The game balls whose storage has been released reach the V winning sensor 192 at timing t15, which is slightly delayed from the start timing of the fourth round game (timing t14). As a result, the V winning flag is turned on in the fourth round game, and the execution of the fifth round game is confirmed (FIG. 39(g)).

<About the gameplay of each round game>
Next, the gameplay of each round game in the second opening/closing execution mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the gameplay of each round game.

The winning characteristic of the accessory device 150 in the second round round game is the winning characteristic A in which the game ball is likely to enter the accessory device 150 in each opening from the 1st to the 13th round (see FIG. 32(e)). It has become. On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 1st to the 13th are that the winning balls reach the rotating body 201 from the 1st to the 6th in the first half. The distribution characteristic A is easy (see FIG. 34(c)), and the latter half from the 7th to the 13th game is the distribution characteristic B in which winning balls are easily stored in the accessory device 150. For this reason, in the second round of the round game, it is easy to expect both a V winning (self-supporting continuation) via the rotating body 201 and the accumulation of winning balls.

Since the second round game is the first round game in the second opening/closing execution mode, winning balls from the previous round game are not carried over due to stored balls. Therefore, in order to perform the third round game, it is necessary to make a V win via the rotating body 201 in the second round game. Therefore, by providing the above-mentioned gameplay characteristics, the above-mentioned V winning is made easier to occur, and the difficulty level of the third round is prevented from becoming excessively high.

By the way, the round game is configured to end when the number of winning game balls to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number (9 balls). Therefore, the round game may end in the middle of the second game section. In this case, if the state in which the winning ball is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 occurs earlier than the state in which the winning ball is likely to reach the rotating body 201, the round will start early before or after switching to the latter state. There is a risk that the game will end and the opportunity to continue on your own (win a V prize to play the third round) will not be satisfactorily provided. As a result, even if you have accumulated game balls in the second round and acquired the right to play the fourth round, the third round will not be held and the above accumulation will likely come to nothing, which is a disappointing result. .

In this regard, the present embodiment is configured such that in the second round, a state in which the winning ball is likely to reach the rotating body 201 occurs before a state in which the winning ball is likely to be stored in the accessory device 150. With this configuration, opportunities for self-sufficiency are suitably secured, making it easier to carry out the third round. This makes it easier to provide a gaming experience in which the player aims to acquire the right to play the fourth round after confirming the execution of the third round.

The winning characteristics in the accessory device 150 in the round game of the third round are the winning characteristics B in which the game balls are likely to win in the accessory device 150 in each opening from the 7th to the 13th time (see FIG. 32(e)). It has become. On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 7th to the 13th round are such that the winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150 as in the case of the second round. The distribution characteristic B is easy. For this reason, in the third round of the round game, emphasis is placed on the game in which winning balls are stored in the accessory device 150.

In this case, if a winning ball can be stored in the second round, the stored ball will win a V prize in the third round and the fourth round will be held, and the winning ball will be stored in the third round. If they can do so, they will be able to obtain the right to participate in the fifth round. On the other hand, if winning balls are not stored in the second round, even if winning balls are stored in the third round, there is a possibility that the fourth round will not be held, so it does not necessarily mean that the fifth round will be held. Not exclusively. In this way, in a round game that places emphasis on the game of storing winning balls in the accessory device 150, the game result of the previous round (whether or not the winning balls were stored) has a large influence.

Note that it is not impossible to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the 1st to 6th and 14th to 19th openings in the third round. Therefore, although it is more difficult than the second round, it is also possible to win a V prize via the rotating body 201 in the third round of the round game. The gameplay of the round games from the 4th round to the 7th round is the same as the gameplay of the 3rd round.

The winning characteristics in the accessory device 150 in the 8th to 11th rounds of the round games are the winning characteristics D (Fig. 32 ( (see e)). In other words, in the round game from the 8th round to the 11th round, it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize in each of the 1st to 13th openings. For this reason, in these round games, both the storage of game balls and the V winning via the rotating body 201 are unlikely to occur until the end of the round game, and the round game may end without either of them occurring. The gameplay creates a sense of frustration.

On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the 14th to the 19th are such that winning balls are likely to be stored in the accessory device 150 and reach the rotating body 201. The distribution characteristic C is easy to use. In other words, in the final stage of the round when winning to the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, both the storage of game balls and the V winning via the rotating body 201 are likely to occur.

The winning characteristics in the accessory device 150 in the round game from the 12th round to the 16th round are the winning characteristics C (Fig. 32 ( (see e)). On the other hand, the distribution characteristics of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in each opening from the first to the sixth distribution are distribution characteristics A in which winning balls easily reach the rotating body 201. For this reason, these round games have a gameplay that places emphasis on V winnings (self-successful continuation) via the rotating body 201.

In this way, in some rounds, more weight is given to the game of storing winning balls, while in other rounds, more weight is given to the game of achieving self-sufficiency, so that the gameplay differs depending on the round. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of games in one second opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to suppress monotony of games.

At this time, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotary body 201 are made common in each round, and the gameplay is made to differ depending on the opening/closing pattern of each round. In this case, it is not necessary to set both the operation pattern of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 and the opening/closing pattern in detail for each round, and it is sufficient to set only the opening/closing pattern. Therefore, the processing load on the main controller 81 and the work load when designing the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, the following effects are also expected. In a configuration in which an advantageous state (round continuation) occurs when the winning ball enters the accessory device 150 and wins a V prize, the player's attention is likely to be focused on the whereabouts of the winning game ball that enters the accessory device 150. In this case, it is assumed that the player shows a strong interest in the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201, which influence the flow of winning balls, and is watching their movements. Under such circumstances, if the movement patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotary body 201 are made different in each round, there is a risk that the players will notice this and understand that the changes in characteristics have been planned in advance and become disinterested. be. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the movements of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotary body 201 are common in each round, such awareness can be suppressed. This makes it easier to feel that differences in the ease of being stored between rounds are due to chance, and it is possible to suitably provide the fun of enjoying the behavior of the game balls.

<About the flow of remaining ball monitoring>
Next, the flow of remaining ball monitoring will be explained with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of remaining ball monitoring.

As already explained, in this embodiment, winning balls to the accessory device 150 can be stored in the accessory device 150 in each round game, and the stored balls can be stored in the accessory device 150 in a subsequent round game. It is supposed to be discharged from the Therefore, in a round game in which accumulation occurs, the number of ejected balls will be smaller than the number of winning balls at the end of the round game. In this case, if the process of determining the remaining balls is performed every round, the remaining balls will frequently become abnormal even though the game is being played normally, and there is a risk that the progress of the game will be hindered.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the remaining ball determination process is not performed every round, but is performed only once at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t18). As a result, even though the game ball won by the accessory device 150 can be ejected in the next round, it is possible to prevent the remaining ball abnormality from occurring frequently, and it is possible to proceed with the game smoothly.

Here, the flow of remaining ball monitoring using the remaining ball determination process is summarized as follows. As already explained, the remaining ball monitoring in the second opening/closing execution mode is performed based on the remaining ball counter RPC (see step S2411 in FIG. 38). This remaining ball counter RPC is not cleared during the second opening/closing execution mode, but is updated throughout from the start to the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. Then, at the end of the ending, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 or not, and if it is not 0 (when the number of winning balls and the number of ejected balls do not match), it is determined that there is a remaining ball abnormality.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining ball monitoring is performed from the start timing to the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, specifically, from the timing when a winning is first made to accessory device 150 in the second round to the final timing. The period to be monitored is until the final winning ball is ejected from the accessory device 150 in the 16th round.

However, even if the number of balls ejected from the accessory device 150 is counted, it is not possible to identify which ball is the final ball, so in this embodiment, all winning balls to the accessory device 150 are ejected. The remaining balls are determined at the end of the ending, which is expected to be the same. In addition, if the second opening/closing execution mode does not continue until the 16th round and ends in the middle of the round, that round will be the final round, and the remaining balls will be determined at the end of the ending that is performed after the end of the round. .

Here, as an event that causes a residual ball abnormality, for example, an act of attempting to illegally win a V prize by inserting an illegal ball with a thread attached into the accessory device 150 and manipulating the illegal ball through the thread is performed. This may be the case. In this case, if you repeatedly pull and loosen the string and manipulate the illegal ball to repeatedly pass the V winning sensor 192, the number of balls ejected from the accessory device 150 will exceed the number of winning balls into the accessory device 150. The number becomes large and the two become inconsistent.

If it is determined that the remaining ball is abnormal due to such an event, the game will enter a game stop state and the game progress will be stopped. Further, when it is determined that there is a residual ball abnormality, an external signal indicating the occurrence of the residual ball abnormality is output to the management control device on the game parlor side. These processes suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A winning game ball can be stored in the accessory device 150, and the stored ball can pass through a V winning sensor 192 (V winning hole 182a) in the next round game. Normally, a round game in which you can acquire the right to play by winning a winning ball in one round game will be the next round from the round game in which the winning ball occurred, but in this embodiment, the winning ball will be used to win rounds one after another. It is possible to acquire the right to use the game, and it is possible to realize innovative gameplay.

At that time, if the winning game ball is not stored in the accessory device 150, the winning ball is configured to be able to pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which the winning occurs. In this case, for example, if we focus on the implementation of the fourth round, the opportunity to acquire the right to implement the round will be provided over multiple rounds such as the second and third rounds. This makes it possible to maintain expectations for the continuation of the round for a long time, and to improve interest.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 and the execution timing of remaining ball determination. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode.

The distribution mode of the second distribution member 310 in the second to fourth rounds is the same as in the first embodiment. That is, after 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start timing of each release in each round game, the game ball that has won in the accessory device 150 is switched to the distribution state where it is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side, and then 0.3 sec This state is maintained for a period of time (see FIG. 34(b)).

On the other hand, in the fifth round of the round game, as shown in FIG. It is maintained in a non-distributed state where it is distributed to the guide path 183 side. That is, in the fifth round of the round game, the second distribution member 310 is not switched to the distribution state (see FIG. 42(b)).

Therefore, in the fifth round of the round game, the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 cannot be moved to the entrance guide section 215, and storage of game balls in the accessory device 150 is restricted. Although not shown in FIG. 42, the opening and closing manner of the opening/closing accessory 168, the distribution manner of the first distribution member 300, and the operation manner of the rotating body 201 are the same as in the first embodiment. It is.

Further, in this embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed at the end of the fifth round of the round game. Specifically, after the final opening/closing in the fifth round, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter RPC is 0 at the timing when the waiting time at the end has elapsed. If the remaining ball counter RPC is not 0, it is assumed that there is a remaining ball abnormality, and the remaining ball flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 114. That is, in this embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed during the second opening/closing execution mode.

Here, an example of the flow of the round game from the second round to the fifth round will be explained. Here, it is assumed that in each of the second to fifth rounds, the same number of game balls as the upper limit number (9) enter the accessory device 150. In addition, in each of the second to fourth rounds, the timing at which the second sorting member 310 is switched to the sorting state matches the timing at which the game ball enters the accessory device 150, and the accessory device 150 receives the game ball. It is assumed that game balls are stored in the device 150.

When game balls are stored in the second round game (timing t21), the game balls are maintained in a stored state until the end of the round. Then, at timing t22 when the second round game ends, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state and the storage is released. Since a predetermined movement period (approximately 2 seconds) is required for the game ball whose storage has been released to reach the V winning sensor 192, the game ball will not reach the V winning sensor 192 after the third round game starts. (timing t23).

In other words, the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 after the third round game has started. Therefore, at timing t22, which is the end of the second round of the round game, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is one less than the winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150. Become.

In the third round game, the game balls released from storage in the second round game reach the V winning sensor 192, so the number of balls ejected is incremented by one. However, the game balls are stored at timing t24, and the game balls that hit the accessory device 150 during the third round are carried over to the fourth round. Since the above-mentioned addition is offset by this carryover, even at timing t25, which is the end of the third round, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is still one less.

Similarly, at timing t27, which is the end of the fourth round of the round game, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is 1 because the winning balls are accumulated in the middle of the 4th round (timing t26). There will be fewer items. That is, at the end of each of the second to fourth rounds, the number of winning balls and the number of ejected balls cannot match even if the game is played normally, so the remaining ball determination is not performed at these timings.

In the fifth round game, the game balls released from storage in the fourth round game reach the V winning sensor 192, so the number of balls to be ejected is incremented by 1 (timing t28). Furthermore, in the fifth round of the round game, storage of game balls is regulated, so all game balls that have won prizes during the fifth round are discharged during the fifth round. For this reason, when comparing the number of prizes won and the number of discharged prizes for only five rounds, the number of prizes discharged is one more than the number of prizes won. This surplus compensates for the shortfall in the number of ejected pieces that occurred at the end of the fourth round, and the total number of winning pieces and the number of ejected pieces match.

From the player's point of view, although it was possible to store the game balls up to the fourth round, in the fifth round, the second distribution member 310 suddenly became unable to switch to the distribution state, and the game balls were stored. Storage becomes impossible. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that a failure has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable to use a system that notifies the player that it is possible to save money in the second to fourth rounds, but that it is not possible in the fifth round. With such a configuration, in the second to fourth rounds of round games, on the display screen G of the accessory device 150, a specific notification such as a character display, a character display, a background display, etc. indicating that storage is possible is displayed. However, it may be configured such that it is not performed in the fifth round game, or that different notifications are made in each round game of the second to fourth rounds and the fifth round.

At timing t29, which is the end of the fifth round game, a remaining ball determination is performed. In other words, the remaining ball determination is performed with the period from the second round to the fifth round as the monitoring target period. As mentioned above, if the game is being played normally, the number of won balls and the number of ejected balls usually match and the remaining ball counter RPC becomes 0. In this case, the remaining ball abnormality is not recognized and the game continues from the 6th round onward. On the other hand, for example, if an act of repeatedly passing the V winning sensor 192 is performed using an illegal ball with a thread attached, the number of ejected balls will be greater than the number of winning balls, resulting in a residual ball abnormality.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, a round game in which storage is regulated is provided, and the remaining balls are determined at the end of the round game, so even though the winning balls are ejected in the next round, , the remaining ball determination can be performed during the second opening/closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to quickly grasp the abnormality of the remaining balls, and it is possible to suppress the damage to the gaming hall from increasing in the event of fraudulent activity.

As in the case of the second to fourth rounds, storage of game balls in the accessory device 150 is allowed in the sixth to ninth rounds of the round game, and storage is restricted in the tenth round of the round game. be done. Furthermore, in the 11th to 15th round games, storage of game balls in the accessory device 150 is allowed, and in the 16th round game, storage is restricted. Then, at the end of the 10th round and the 16th round of the round game (timings t30, t31), remaining ball determination is performed. That is, in the second opening/closing execution mode, the remaining ball determination is performed every predetermined number of rounds.

It is to be noted that the round in which the remaining balls are determined by regulating the accumulation is set arbitrarily, and is not limited to the 5th round, the 10th round, and the 16th round. Further, the number of rounds in which storage is restricted is also arbitrary; for example, the configuration may be such that storage is restricted only once in the 8th round and the remaining ball determination is performed.

If it is determined that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls, the game is shifted to a stopped state as in the first embodiment. Incidentally, the residual ball abnormality may occur not only due to fraudulent activity but also when storage is not properly released due to malfunction of the shutter 221. For example, if for some reason the shutter 221 is not switched to the open state at the end of the fourth round, the game balls will remain in the accessory device 150, and at the end of the fifth round, the number of ejected balls will be is one less than the number of prizes won.

In this way, since a residual ball abnormality is not necessarily caused by cheating, it is desirable to be able to change the response when a residual ball abnormality occurs depending on whether or not it is caused by cheating. Therefore, this embodiment has the following configuration.

After transitioning to the game stop state, the power switch 92b is operated by the game hall attendant or the like to turn off and on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in order to cancel the state, but at that time, the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed. If the power is turned on while the main processing is being performed, initialization processing of the RAM 114 (step S509) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 18). As a result, the V win in the fifth round game (timing t28 in FIG. 42) is invalidated, and it becomes impossible to play the continuation of the second opening/closing execution mode (sixth round round game).

On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a, the initialization process of the RAM 114 (step S509) is not executed. Further, by the processing of steps S512 and S513 in the main processing, the state of the remaining ball abnormality is also canceled, and the game state returns to the state before shifting to the game stop state. As a result, the V winning in the fifth round becomes valid, and it becomes possible to continue playing the game.

With this configuration, if a game hall attendant or the like rushes to the bottom of the pachinko machine 10 and confirms fraudulent activity, they can turn on the power while operating the RAM erase switch 98a. Even after that, the fraudster will be prevented from continuing to receive unfair benefits. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is no fraudulent activity, or if no fraudulent activity is confirmed, it is possible to continue playing the game by turning on the power without operating the RAM erase switch 98a, which increases the player's profit. can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, in the case where a distinction is made between legitimate players and fraudulent players, the following configuration may be used.

First, when transitioning to the game stop state, the shutter 221 is closed. That is, when the shutter 221 is in the closed state at the time of transition to the game stop state, the operation of the shutter 221 is controlled so that the closed state is maintained even after the transition to the game stop state. As a result, if game balls are stored in the accessory device 150, the storage state is not released and the game stops.

Thereafter, in order to cancel the game stop state, the power switch 92b is operated by an attendant at the game parlor or the like to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10, but in that case as well, the shutter 221 is maintained in the closed state. In other words, the storage state is maintained even after the power is turned off. Incidentally, in this embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, when the shutter drive section 221a is not driven, the shutter 221 is in the closed state. Therefore, there is no need to supply backup power to the shutter drive unit 221a during a power outage. In addition, in the structure in which the shutter 221 is in a closed state by driving the shutter drive part 221a, it is preferable to supply backup power to the shutter drive part 221a and set it in an excited state.

If the power is turned on without the RAM erase switch 98a being pressed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is started up without switching the shutter 221 to the open state. In this case, the remaining ball abnormality state is canceled by the processing of steps S512 and S513 in the main processing (FIG. 18), and the game state returns to the state before shifting to the game stop state. In this case as well, the storage state is maintained without switching the shutter 221 to the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the remaining ball abnormality and the game stop state while leaving the stored balls. This makes it possible to continue playing the game that was interrupted by the game stop process using the remaining stored balls as service balls. In other words, the sixth round of the round game would normally be a round with no balls carried over from the previous round, but if the game is stopped due to a malfunction of the shutter 221, etc., there will be balls carried over. It becomes possible to play the 6th round.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed, the RAM initialization process is executed and the game cannot be continued, so the service ball cannot be provided as described above. Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed, the shutter drive section 221a is driven and the shutter 221 is switched to the open state. Specifically, after an affirmative determination is made in step S503 of the main process (FIG. 18), a process of switching the shutter 221 to the open state is executed before setting interrupt permission in step S516. As a result, if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the accessory device 150 and the second sorting member 310 is operated to fraudulently store game balls, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from occurring again using the stored balls. can be suppressed.

At this time, the interrupt permission setting process (step S516) is executed after the predetermined standby time has elapsed. That is, when the shutter 221 is switched to the open state upon startup of the pachinko machine 10, the V winning is enabled after the predetermined waiting time has elapsed after the RAM erase switch 98a is operated. In this case, the predetermined waiting time is set to be longer than the period required for the game balls released from storage to reach the V winning sensor 192. With such a configuration, the game ball that is released from storage at startup passes the V-win sensor 192, resulting in a V-win or a V-win error (which occurs when a V-win occurs at a timing when a V-win should not occur). errors) can be suppressed from occurring.

Note that instead of the above standby process, a configuration may be adopted in which the discharge confirmation process is performed and then the interrupt permission setting process is performed. That is, based on detecting the passage of the V prize winning sensor 192, it may be determined that the game ball that has been released from storage is discharged from the accessory device 150, and then permission for interruption may be set.

Furthermore, by configuring the shutter 221 to be switched to the open state when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed, it is possible for a staff member or the like to check the operation of the shutter 221. In other words, even though no fraudulent activity has been discovered, if it is necessary to check whether the shutter 221 operates correctly, this can be done by operating the RAM erase switch 98a.

In the above embodiment, the remaining balls are determined at the end of the fifth round, but in the waiting period (round interval period) provided between the fifth and sixth rounds, the remaining balls are determined. It may be configured to perform the determination. In short, the remaining ball determination may be performed as long as it corresponds to the end of the 5th round, and the execution timing of the remaining ball determination may be after the end of the 5th round and before the start of the 6th round. If so, it is optional. This also applies to the remaining ball determinations performed at the end of the 10th and 16th rounds.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 in the second opening/closing execution mode, the distribution mode of the second distribution member 310, and the execution timing of remaining ball determination. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing pattern table of the opening/closing accessory 168 according to the present embodiment. In addition, in the figure, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, opening and closing patterns B' to D' shown in FIGS. 43A to 43C are set instead of opening and closing patterns B to D shown in FIGS. 32B to 32D. These opening/closing patterns B' to D' are defined in opening/closing pattern tables stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) to (c), each opening/closing pattern table divides the round game into the first game section corresponding to the first to second openings and the third to eighth openings. After dividing into a corresponding second game section, a third game section from the 9th to the 13th time, and a fourth game section from the 14th time to the 19th time, the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 is determined for each game section. is stipulated.

In the opening/closing patterns B' to D', during the 19 openings in one round game, the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec) in the first to second times (RC2 = 19 to 18) belonging to the first game section. Opening is performed for 0.1 sec, which is shorter than that, and then closing is performed for 0.5 sec (also referred to as short opening mode). Then, in the subsequent game section, either the opening/closing pattern P1 or P2 is set, as in the case of FIG. 32. Both of these opening/closing patterns P1 and P2 have longer opening times than the short opening mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in each of the opening and closing patterns B' to D', the opening and closing combinations are opened and closed in a short opening mode in which the opening period is relatively short from the start of the round game until a predetermined period has elapsed. The object 168 is controlled, and then the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled in an opening/closing pattern P1 or P2 in which the period of being in the open state is relatively long.

Here, in the short opening mode, the period of being in the open state is very short, 0.1 sec. Further, in the short opening mode, the period of being in the closed state is 0.5 sec, which is relatively longer than the opening period. That is, under the situation where the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled in a short opening mode, it is in the closed state in most cases, and is switched to the open state only for a moment. Therefore, in the short opening mode, the game ball does not land in the accessory device 150. In this sense, the short opening mode can also be said to be a winning restriction mode that restricts winnings to the accessory device 150.

Next, the remaining ball determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the remaining ball determination process according to this embodiment. Note that the processes in steps S2701 to S2703 shown in FIG. 44 are executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 in FIG. 38, and are executed in place of the processes in steps S2406 and S2407 in FIG. .

If it is determined in step S2405 that the second opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not it is time to execute the remaining ball determination. In this embodiment, when the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the remaining ball determination is performed for each round. Specifically, the remaining balls are determined at the timing when a predetermined period (1 sec) has elapsed from the start of each round game.

The elapsed period after the start of the round game is determined using determination counters provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. That is, a value corresponding to 1 sec is set in the determination counter, and this value is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined period using a timer interrupt process. Then, when the determination counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it can be recognized that the timing for executing the remaining ball determination has arrived.

If it is determined in step S2701 that it is not the time to perform the remaining ball determination, this remaining ball determination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a timing to perform the remaining ball determination, the process advances to step S2702, where it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and the remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball determination in this case targets the period from when one remaining ball determination is performed until the next remaining ball determination is performed. Incidentally, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S2104 in FIG. 35), and is incremented by 1 each time the ejection of a game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. It is incremented (step S2303 in FIG. 37).

If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process advances to step S2703, and it is assumed that game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and the remaining ball flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. do. Thereafter, the remaining ball determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2703 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", it is determined that no game ball remains in the accessory device 150, and the main remaining ball determination process is immediately terminated.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode. Here, the explanation will proceed assuming that game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 during the second round.

When the second round game ends at timing t41, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the game balls stored in the entrance guide section 215 move toward the warp passage 210. At the same time, the game enters a standby state (round interval) in which it waits for the start of the third round game, and this standby state continues for 1.5 seconds. Here, it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball whose storage is released to reach the V winning sensor 192, and this time is about 0.5 seconds longer than the duration of the round interval. Therefore, the game balls whose storage has been released reach the V winning sensor 192 after approximately 0.5 sec has elapsed after the start of the third round game (timing t43).

When the third round game is started at timing t42, the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to open/close in a short opening mode. Since the short open mode repeats the open state for 0.1 sec and the closed state for 0.5 sec twice, the execution period of the short open mode is 1.2 sec in total (timing t45).

Further, at timing t44 when 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the third round game, a remaining ball determination corresponding to the second round game is performed. That is, it is determined whether all the game balls that won the prize in the accessory device 150 in the second round game have been discharged from the accessory device 150. In other words, in this embodiment, the remaining ball determination corresponding to the round game of the second round is performed for a predetermined period from the end of the second round (2.5 seconds, which is the sum of the round interval period of 1.5 seconds and the above-mentioned 1 second). ) is configured to be executed after the period. In the determination process, if the number of winning game balls into the accessory device 150 and the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 do not match, it is treated as a remaining ball abnormality.

Similarly, the storage is released at the end of the third round game (timing t46), and the game balls whose storage is released are released after approximately 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the fourth round game. The V winning sensor 192 is reached (timing t48). In addition, the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to open and close in a short opening mode until 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fourth round (timing t50), and furthermore, at timing t49 when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the fourth round, A determination is made as to whether there are any remaining balls. This remaining ball determination corresponds to the third round game. That is, it is a process of checking whether all the game balls that won the prize in the accessory device 150 in the third round game have been discharged from the accessory device 150.

Here, the relationship between the winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 and the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 will be explained. Here, the above relationship will be explained with reference to the period from timing t45 to timing t50.

When the short opening mode ends at timing t45, the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to either opening/closing pattern P1 or P2. In these opening/closing modes, winnings to the accessory device 150 are allowed, so winnings occur between timings t45 and t46. Of the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150, game balls other than the stored game balls are discharged from the accessory device 150 by timing t46 when the third round ends. Therefore, at timing t46, the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150 is one less than the winning number of game balls entered into the accessory device 150.

When the fourth round is started at timing t47, the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to open/close in a short opening mode until timing t50 when 1.2 seconds have elapsed from timing t47. In the short opening mode, since the game ball cannot be won in the accessory device 150, no new winning occurs between timings t47 and t50.

Here, 1.2 sec, which is the execution period of the short release mode, is longer than the elapsed period (approximately 0.5 sec) until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 after the start of the 4th round. . Therefore, the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 during execution of the short release mode. As described above, since no new winnings occur while the short release mode is being executed, at timing t48 when the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, the number of winning game balls and the winning object are displayed in the accessory device 150. The number of game balls discharged from the device 150 matches.

This state is maintained until timing t50 when the short opening mode ends. Therefore, by performing the remaining ball determination at timing t49, which is the timing after the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 and before the end of the short release mode, it is possible to appropriately determine the remaining ball abnormality. I can do it.

In this way, during the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is controlled to open and close in the short opening mode, the game ball stored in the previous round game is allowed to pass through the V winning sensor 192, so that the accessory device 150 is configured to pass the game balls stored in the previous round game. It is possible to allow the balls released from storage to pass through V while avoiding the period in which the balls win prizes. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the mixture of storage release balls and winning balls in the accessory device 150, and to make it easy to understand which game ball has passed through V.

In addition, since the structure is such that the remaining balls are determined during the execution of the short release mode and after the storage release ball has passed V, the remaining balls can be determined for each round even when the game balls are carried over. , it becomes possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that is resistant to residual ball abnormalities. Furthermore, since the remaining ball determination is performed overlappingly with the round game, the smooth progress of the game can be promoted compared to the case where the round game is started after the remaining ball determination is performed.

In addition, although it is a short opening mode, since the opening/closing accessory 168 is in an open state, a prize may occur depending on the falling situation of the game ball. In this case, if it is immediately determined that there is an abnormality in the remaining balls due to a mismatch between the number of prize winning pieces and the number of ejected pieces, the game is likely to be interrupted due to an erroneous determination. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the discrepancy between the winning number and the ejected number is not determined to be a residual ball abnormality only once, but is determined to be a residual ball abnormality if the discrepancy occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice) in a row.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the second opening/closing execution mode, in the second round game which is the first round, there is no carrying over (storage) of game balls from the previous round game, so the rotating body 201 is Unless you achieve V-winning (self-success), you will not be able to proceed from the 3rd round onwards. For this reason, compared to round games from the third round onwards where you can expect carryover balls, the difficulty level of acquiring the right to play the next round is higher, and a situation may arise where the second opening/closing execution mode ends by the second round. easy.

In particular, in the second round, even though the game balls were able to be stored in the accessory device 150, if self-sufficiency could not be achieved, the second opening/closing execution mode would not only end prematurely, but The precious storage bulb will be ruined. In this case, the player may be greatly disappointed, and there is a risk that the player's desire to play may be diminished. The present embodiment is intended to provide relief in such a case, and its configuration will be described in detail below.

This embodiment is different from the above embodiments in the switching manner of the shutter 221. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the open process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment. Here, the processing of steps S2801 to S2804 shown in FIG. 46 is executed between step S2104 and step S2105 in the open processing of FIG. 35. Note that the process during opening in FIG. 35 is a process for switching the opening/closing accessory 168 from the open state to the closed state in the second opening/closing execution mode.

After updating the remaining ball counter RPC in step S2104, it is determined in step S2801 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15". The first round counter RC1 counts what round the round game is, and in step S2801, it is determined whether the round game being executed is the first round (second round) in the second opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15" and the round game being executed is the second round, the process advances to step S2802, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter PC is "1" or not. . The winning counter PC counts the number of winning game balls placed on the accessory device 150, and its value indicates the remaining number of winning balls up to the upper limit number of winning balls (9 balls). In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the number of prizes entered into the accessory device 150 is one remaining up to the upper limit number of prizes.

If the value of the winning counter PC is "1" and the number of winnings in the accessory device 150 is one remaining up to the upper limit number of winnings, in step S2803, V winnings are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Determine whether the flag is stored. That is, in the second round of the round game, it is determined whether or not the V winning (self-successful continuation) via the rotating body 201 has been achieved.

If the V winning flag is not stored and self-continuation has not been achieved, shutter release processing is executed in step S2804. In step S2804, the shutter drive unit 221a is driven to switch the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, if a game ball is stored in the entrance guide section 215 (see FIG. 8), the storage is released and the game ball moves toward the V winning sensor 192 through the warp passage 210.

After executing step S2804, the process advances to step S2105, and a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" is performed. Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in steps S2801 and S2802, or an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the process proceeds to step S2105.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second round game. Here, the explanation will proceed assuming that game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at timing t51, which is in the middle of the second round.

At timing t52, when the eighth game ball wins in the accessory device 150 (FIG. 47(c)), it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. In the example shown in FIG. 47, since the V winning flag is not stored (FIG. 47(g)), the shutter 221 is also switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t52 (FIG. 47(e)). As a result, storage of game balls is released (FIG. 47(f)).

The travel time for the storage release ball to reach the V winning sensor 192 is about 2 seconds, but each round game in the second opening/closing execution mode is provided with a waiting time of 3.5 seconds at the end. Therefore, the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 at timing t53 before timing t54 when the second round ends (FIG. 47(g)). As a result, a V win occurs in the second round game, and the right to play the third round is acquired.

In this way, at a specific timing in the second round (timing when there is only one prize left up to the maximum number of prizes), it is determined whether the V has been passed (whether or not the player has achieved self-sufficiency), and whether or not the V has been passed is determined. If there are no game balls, the shutter 221 is opened to release the storage and the game balls are passed through V during the second round of the game, so it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to play the third round even though the game balls are stored. .

In addition, since the opening process of the shutter 221 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of storage, the shutter 221 is opened at timing t52 even when there are no stored balls in the second round game. However, since there are no stored balls, V winnings will not occur. In other words, the above-mentioned relief measures will only work if the accumulation is achieved in the second round of gaming, and there will be a difference in the degree of preferential treatment in the case where the accumulation is not achieved. .

Although not shown in FIG. 47, if the V winning flag is stored at timing t52, that is, if self-sufficiency is achieved, the shutter 221 is not opened at timing t53, and the above-mentioned As in the first embodiment, the shutter 221 is opened at timing t54 when the second round ends. Therefore, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the third round, thereby acquiring the right to perform the fourth round. In other words, the configuration is more advantageous for the player than if he was unable to continue on his own in the second round.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in the opening standby time (opening timing) in the first opening/closing execution mode, the switching mode of the shutter 221, and the execution timing of remaining ball determination.

Briefly explaining this embodiment, in this embodiment, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the second opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result), the It is configured to release the storage of game balls. Then, if the timing at which the storage release ball passes the V-winning sensor 192 and the execution timing of the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the normal opening result) after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, then , the second opening/closing execution mode by the storage release ball occurs. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience, the explanation will proceed assuming that the upper limit of the number of common reservations is one.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release timing table according to this embodiment. The release timing table is stored in the release timing table storage area 113c in the ROM 113.

In the release timing table, the release waiting time is defined in association with the release type counter CS. Here, if there is no pending information, the opening waiting time is the waiting time from the winning to the actuating ports 38, 39 to the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, and if there is pending information, the opening waiting time is the waiting time when the pending information is consumed ( This is the waiting time from when the validity determination process of step S805 (FIG. 21) is performed for the pending information until the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the release table according to this embodiment, two types of release waiting time, 0.5 sec and 2.5 sec, are set. The release waiting time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to "0" to "89" of the release type counter CS, and the release waiting time of 2.5 seconds corresponds to "90" to "99" of the release type counter CS. There is. That is, the probability that an open waiting time of 0.5 sec will be selected is 9/10, and the probability that an open waiting time of 2.5 sec will be selected is 1/10, and the latter probability is lower. .

Next, the remaining ball determination process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 49(a). The process in FIG. 49(a) is executed in place of the remaining ball determination process in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment.

In the remaining ball determination process according to this embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The determination standby flag indicates that the remaining ball determination process is on standby after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, and is set at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode.

If the determination standby flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the process advances to step S3003 and processes from step S3003 to step S3005 are executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S2402 to S2404 in FIG. 38, so their explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the process advances to step S3006, and it is determined whether the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", the process advances to step S3008, and it is determined whether the ending has ended, that is, whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed.

If the ending has ended, shutter setting processing is executed in step S3009. In this process, the operation mode of the shutter 221 is set so that the shutter 221 switches from the closed state to the open state after a predetermined period (3.5 sec) has elapsed from the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode (ending end timing). . Note that the period for maintaining the open state is arbitrary, but is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds as in the first embodiment.

In the following step S3010, a determination waiting time setting process is executed. The determination waiting time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination process, and in this embodiment, it is the waiting time from the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode. The determination waiting time is the time (approximately The predetermined time is longer than 5.5 seconds, and is set to, for example, 6 seconds.

After executing step S3010, in step S3011, a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and then this remaining ball determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that the determination standby flag is stored, the process advances to step S3012, and it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the remaining ball determination. This process is to determine whether the determination waiting time set in step S3010 above has elapsed. If it is not the execution timing for the remaining ball determination, this remaining ball determination processing is ended, while if it is the execution timing for the remaining ball determination, the process advances to step S3013, and it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed. judge. By executing this process, it is determined whether the execution timing of the remaining ball determination and the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode overlap.

If the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, in step S3014, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and a remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC in this case targets the period from the start of the second opening/closing execution mode to the execution timing. Incidentally, the remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S2104 in FIG. 35 or step S1503 in FIG. 27), and the discharge of game balls from the accessory device 150 is detected. It is decremented by 1 each time (step S2303 in FIG. 37 and step S1506 in FIG. 27).

If it is determined in step S3014 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process advances to step S3015, and it is assumed that game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and the remaining balls are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Store flags. After executing step S3015, or if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" in step S3014, the determination standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is erased in step S3016. . Thereafter, the remaining ball determination process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3013, that is, if it is determined that the first opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the processing of steps S3014 and S3015 (remaining ball determination) is skipped, and the processing of step S3016 is executed. The remaining ball determination in this case is performed in step S3004. That is, if the execution timing of the remaining ball determination and the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode overlap, the remaining ball determination is executed at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode.

Next, normal processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 49(b). FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart showing normal processing. Note that FIG. 49(b) shows only the parts that are different from the normal process in FIG. 19, and the process in step S3101 in FIG. 49(b) is executed in step S606 (gaming state transition process) in FIG. It is done after

In step S3101, shutter processing is executed. This process is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 in a situation where neither the first opening/closing execution mode nor the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Specifically, when the drive timing of the shutter 221 set in step S3009 arrives and the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process. Note that if the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the drive timing of the shutter 221 arrives, the shutter 221 is changed from the closed state to the open state in the processing for the intra-acting part in the accessory in step S809 of FIG. Switch.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. 50 and 51 are timing charts for explaining the flow of the game after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. The case is shown in which 0.5 sec is selected as the time. Here, in both cases of FIGS. 50 and 51, game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, and the common reservation number is one. Let's proceed with the explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 50, a case will be described in which an open standby time of 2.5 seconds is selected. When the second opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t61, the pending information held in the first result display section holding area Ra or the second result display section holding area Rb is shifted to the execution area AE, and a validity judgment is performed. be exposed. It is assumed that the result of the validity determination in this case is a normal open result. After execution of the propriety judgment, the opening/closing accessory 168 starts waiting to be opened, and this state continues until the opening waiting time (2.5 sec) has elapsed.

When the opening waiting time elapses at timing t62, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state. Further, at timing t62, the first opening/closing execution mode is started as the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened. At timing t63 when the opening time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from timing t62, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the open state to the closed state. After the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the closed state, the end of the first opening/closing execution mode is awaited until timing t66 when the end standby time (3.5 sec) has elapsed. While in the first opening/closing execution mode, when the game ball passes the V winning sensor 192, it is validated and a V winning occurs. Note that the elapsed time from the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t61) to the end of the first opening/closing execution mode is 2.5 sec, which is the opening standby time, and 0, which is the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168. .5 sec and 3.5 sec, which is the standby time at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode, is 6.5 sec.

Further, at timing t64, when 3.5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t61), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the storage state of game balls in the accessory device 150 is released, and the storage released balls start moving toward the V winning sensor 192. The storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192 at timing t65, when approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the storage release.

In this case, the arrival timing is 5.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, and the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode (timing t66) is 6.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode. ). Therefore, when the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192, a V winning occurs, and the second opening/closing execution mode is newly started.

In this way, the game balls stored during the second opening/closing execution mode remain even after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, and are released from storage after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, so the second opening/closing execution mode is activated by the storage balls. You can make them stay together. As a result, it is possible to enhance the joy when winning balls are stored, and it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, when waiting for release of storage after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, notification indicating the timing of release of storage and the waiting time until the timing is sent to the symbol display device 51, display light emitting unit 63, speaker unit 64, etc. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the For example, when notifying with the symbol display device 51, it is preferable to perform a specific display at the timing of release of storage or to display a standby time. When displaying the standby time, the remaining standby time until the storage release timing may be displayed not only at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, but also at a predetermined timing after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. good. Further, for example, a countdown display, a level gauge, etc. may be used to suggest a change in the remaining time, or a notification may be made to suggest the elapsed time after the second opening/closing execution mode ends. Control regarding these notifications can be performed by the display control device 100 that controls the symbol display device 51 and the production control device 82 that controls the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a case will be described in which an open standby time of 0.5 sec is selected. When the second opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t71, a validity determination is made based on the reservation information held in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb. It is assumed that the result of the validity determination in this case is a normal open result. After execution of the propriety judgment, the opening/closing accessory 168 starts waiting to be opened, and this state continues until the opening waiting time (0.5 sec) has elapsed. At timing t72 when the opening standby time has elapsed, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state and the first opening/closing execution mode is started.

Furthermore, at timing t73, when 3.5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (timing t71), the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the storage state of game balls in the accessory device 150 is released, and the storage released balls start moving toward the V winning sensor 192. The storage release ball reaches the V winning prize sensor 192 at timing t75 when about 2 seconds have passed since the storage release.

On the other hand, the first opening/closing execution mode started from timing t72 is 4 seconds from the start of the mode (0.5 seconds which is the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168, and 3 seconds which is the waiting time at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode). The process ends at timing t74 when a total time of 5 seconds has elapsed. Here, the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode is 4.5 seconds after the end timing of the second opening/closing execution mode, whereas the timing at which the storage release ball reaches the V prize sensor 192 is the timing at which the second opening/closing execution mode ends. It is 5.5 seconds from the end timing of the mode. That is, after the first opening/closing execution mode ends, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192. In this case, even if the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192, it will not be valid and no V winning will occur. Therefore, a new second opening/closing execution mode is not started.

In this way, when the opening standby time of 0.5 sec is selected, the configuration is such that the second opening/closing execution mode does not continue even if the first opening/closing execution mode is executed, so when the second opening/closing execution mode ends, Even in a situation where there is storage and there is a hold, successive purchases in the second opening/closing execution mode are not guaranteed. As a result, even if the game balls are stored and put on hold, the player cannot relax, and it becomes possible to continue drawing attention to the development of the game until a new second opening/closing execution mode occurs.

In addition, since the ease with which the second opening/closing execution mode can be used consecutively varies depending on the selected opening/closing waiting time, it is possible to have a strong interest in which opening waiting time is selected after the second opening/closing execution mode ends. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the game.

At that time, if notification is to be made based on pending extinguishment or winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 (if there is no pending), there will be cases where 2.5 sec open standby time is selected and 0.5 sec open standby time. It is preferable that the notification mode of the notification is made common or indistinguishable depending on whether the notification is selected or not. In this case, it becomes difficult to estimate the opening waiting time from the notification, and it becomes difficult to predict consecutive games in advance. For this reason, it becomes possible to maintain the tension until the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 and it becomes clear whether there is a consecutive win or not. The above-mentioned notification may be performed as a display effect on the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting section 63, or may be performed as an audio effect on the speaker section 64.

In addition, in the above description with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, it is assumed that the game balls are stored in the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, but there may be cases where the game balls are not stored. That is, in the final round in the second opening/closing execution mode, the second distribution member 310 is not fixed to the distribution state side, but is divided into the distribution state and non-distribution state according to the distribution pattern table shown in FIG. 34(b). It is controlled by switching to the minute state. Therefore, depending on the winning timing of the game ball to the accessory device 150, the final round (second opening/closing execution mode) may end without the winning ball being distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. With such a configuration, it is possible to arouse a sense of tension that the second opening/closing execution mode may end without storage, making it more interesting than when the second opening/closing execution mode is simply passed through. It is possible to improve your sexuality.

Next, the execution timing of remaining ball determination will be explained with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of remaining ball determination.

In this embodiment, there are two cases: (1) when the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed, and (2) when the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the determination waiting time has passed. , the execution timing of remaining ball determination is different.

(1) If the first opening/closing execution mode is not being executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the determination waiting time (6 sec) set at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode has elapsed. At timing t77, remaining ball determination is performed. In this case, even if the first opening/closing execution mode is performed after the second opening/closing execution mode ends and before the determination waiting time elapses, the ejection of game balls from the accessory device 150 in the second opening/closing execution mode , after all of the ejection of game balls from the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode and the discharge of the game balls stored at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode from the accessory device 150 are completed. The remaining ball determination is executed (see the flow from step S3010 to YES in step S3001 in FIG. 49). Therefore, if the game is being played normally, the number of winnings and the number of winnings will match, and the second opening/closing execution mode, the subsequent first opening/closing execution mode, and after the first opening/closing execution mode ends. It is possible to appropriately determine the remaining balls by summarizing the comings and goings of game balls in each situation, including the discharge of balls released from storage.

Although FIG. 52(a) illustrates a case in which the first opening/closing execution mode is executed after the second opening/closing execution mode is finished, the remaining ball determination can also be performed appropriately even when the first opening/closing execution mode is not executed. It can be carried out. That is, since the remaining ball determination is performed after waiting for the discharge of the storage-released balls, it is possible to perform the remaining ball determination after resolving the situation where the number of discharged balls is one less than that which occurs at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. can.

On the other hand, (2) if the first opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the determination waiting time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the first opening/closing execution mode At timing t78, when the remaining balls are determined. For example, in a configuration in which the remaining balls are determined at timing t77, in the first opening/closing execution mode, if a winning ball is entered into the accessory device 150 immediately before timing t77, and the winning ball is discharged after timing t77, The remaining ball determination will be executed in a state where the number of ejected balls is smaller than the number of winning balls, and there is a possibility that it will be erroneously determined that there is a remaining ball abnormality. In this regard, with the configuration shown in FIG. 52(b), the remaining ball determination is performed after the ejection of winning game balls in the first opening/closing execution mode is completed, so that the above-mentioned erroneous determination can be suppressed.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in that game balls can be stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode.

To briefly explain this embodiment, in this embodiment, winning balls are stored in accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the normal opening result), and when the mode ends, After that, the storage state is maintained for a predetermined period of time. If a new first opening/closing execution mode occurs during the storage state maintenance period, the storage state is canceled and a V winning prize is generated by the storage release ball. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience, the explanation will proceed assuming that the upper limit of the number of common reservations is 0, that is, the reservation function is not provided.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an open timing table according to this embodiment. The release timing table is stored in the release timing table storage area 113c in the ROM 113.

In the release timing table, the release waiting time is defined in association with the release type counter CS. Here, the opening waiting time is the waiting time from winning a prize to the operating ports 38, 39 to opening the opening/closing accessory 168.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the release table according to this embodiment, two types of release waiting time, 0.5 sec and 2 sec, are set. The release waiting time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to "0" to "39" of the release type counter CS, and the release waiting time of 2 seconds corresponds to "40" to "99" of the release type counter CS. That is, the probability that an open standby time of 0.5 seconds will be selected is 2/5, and the probability that an open standby time of 2 seconds will be selected is 3/5, and the former probability is lower.

Next, of the various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81, portions that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

First, in this embodiment, the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 when the first opening/closing execution mode is executed is different from that in the first embodiment. The operation mode of the second distribution member 310 in this case is set in the second distribution setting process of step S1204 in the control start process of FIG.

In this embodiment, in step S1204, the operation mode is changed so that the second distribution member 310 is switched to the distribution state (a mode in which game balls are distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side) during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode. Set. Specifically, after a period TS1' (0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, the non-distribution state is switched to the distribution state, and from there, after a period TS2' (0.3 sec), the state is returned to the non-distribution state. Then, the non-distribution state is maintained until the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, in the first opening/closing execution mode, the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150 can be distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side.

Note that the operation mode of the shutter 221 during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode is set to be maintained in the closed state throughout the first opening/closing execution mode, similarly to the first embodiment.

Next, the game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 54(a). FIG. 54(a) shows only the parts that are different from the game control processing in FIG. 21, and the processing in steps S3201 and S3202 in FIG. , is executed as part of the game ending process.

If it is determined in step S807 that the end standby time has elapsed, that is, if it is the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode, the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S3201. Determine whether or not there is. This process is to determine whether or not a V winning prize has occurred in the first opening/closing execution mode.

If the V winning flag is not stored, shutter setting processing is executed in step S3202. In this process, a waiting time B is set until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after the first opening/closing execution mode ends. This waiting time B corresponds to a period during which game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode are maintained in a stored state after the first opening/closing execution mode ends. The waiting time B is not particularly limited, but is set to, for example, 5 seconds. Further, the maintenance period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the shutter processing of step S3101 is executed during the normal processing (FIG. 19), similarly to the sixth embodiment. ing. The process in step S3101 is for driving and controlling the shutter 221 in a situation where neither the first opening/closing execution mode nor the second opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and the waiting time B set in step S3202 is If the time has elapsed, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state in this process.

Returning to the explanation of the game control process in FIG. 54(a), if it is determined in step S3201 that the V winning flag is stored, the process advances to step S3203, and a shutter opening process is performed to switch the shutter 221 from the closed state to the open state. Execute. Through this process, when a V winning occurs in the first opening/closing execution mode, if game balls are stored in the accessory device 150, the storage is released and the stored balls are discharged from the accessory device 150. .

After executing step S3203 or step S3202, the process advances to step S811, and a process of erasing the first opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed.

Next, the validity determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 54(b). FIG. 54(b) shows only the parts that are different from the validity determination process in FIG. 23, and the processing in steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. , is executed when the result of the validity determination is a normal open result.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the current game result is not a losing result (if it is a normal open result), shutter setting processing is executed in step S3301. In this process, a waiting time A is set until the shutter 221 is switched to the open state after winning a prize at the operating ports 38 and 39. This waiting time A corresponds to the closing period of the shutter 221 from when a prize is won to the operating ports 38 and 39 until the shutter 221 is opened. The opening of the shutter 221 based on the elapse of the standby time A is for allowing the storage release ball to reach the V winning sensor 192 in the first opening/closing execution mode based on winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39. Therefore, it is sufficient that the waiting time A is shorter than the time obtained by subtracting the "moving time of the storage release ball" from the "elapsed period from the above entry award to the end of the first opening/closing execution mode", for example, 0. It is set to .5sec. Further, the maintenance period after switching to the open state is set to 0.3 sec as in the first embodiment.

In the following step S3302, processing is executed to clear the waiting time B set in the above step S3202. As a result, the opening operation of the shutter 221 that was scheduled after the waiting time B has elapsed is not executed (cancelled). That is, in the present embodiment, if a winning occurs in the operating ports 38, 39 during the elapse of the standby time B, the shutter 221 is not opened even after the elapse of the standby time B.

In the following step S3303, it is determined whether a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The determination standby flag indicates that execution of the remaining ball determination process is on standby after the first opening/closing execution mode ends. If the determination standby flag is stored, a process for erasing the determination wait flag is executed in step S3304. After executing step S3304, or if it is determined in step S3303 that the determination standby flag is not stored, a normal release command setting process is executed in step S1107 (FIG. 23).

Next, the remaining ball determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The process in FIG. 55 is executed in place of the remaining ball determination process in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, the processing during the second opening/closing execution mode (processing after step S2405 in FIG. 38) is the same as that in the first embodiment, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the remaining ball determination process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If the determination standby flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3402, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode.

If it is the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not a V winning prize has occurred in the first opening/closing execution mode. If the V winning flag is not stored and no V winning has occurred, the process advances to step S3404, and a determination waiting time setting process is executed.

The determination waiting time defines the execution timing of the remaining ball determination process, and in this embodiment, it is the waiting time from the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode. The determination waiting time is the waiting time B (5 sec) until the shutter is opened set in step S3202 (FIG. 54(a)), and the travel time (approximately 2 sec) until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192. ), and is set to, for example, 7.5 seconds. In the following step S3405, a determination standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, assuming that the remaining ball determination is in a standby state. After execution of step S3405, if a negative determination is made in step S3402 (if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first opening/closing execution mode), or if an affirmative determination is made in step S3403 (if it is determined that the V winning flag is stored) ) ends the remaining ball determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3401 that the determination standby flag is stored, the process advances to step S3406, and it is determined whether the determination wait time set in step S3404 has elapsed. If the determination waiting time has elapsed, in step S3407, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0", and the remaining ball determination is performed. The remaining ball counter RPC is incremented by 1 each time a winning to the accessory device 150 is detected (step S1503 in FIG. 27), and is decremented by 1 each time the discharge of a game ball from the accessory device 150 is detected. (Step S1506 in FIG. 27).

If it is determined in step S3407 that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is not "0", the process advances to step S3408, and it is assumed that game balls remain in the accessory device 150, and the remaining balls are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Store flags. After executing step S3408, or if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter RPC is "0" in step S3407, the determination standby flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is erased in step S3409. . Thereafter, the remaining ball determination process ends.

In addition, if a normal open result is determined when winning a prize in the operating ports 38, 39, it is determined in the previous step S3303 (FIG. 54(b)) whether or not the determination standby flag is stored, and the flag is not stored. If so, the configuration is such that the determination standby flag is cleared in step S3304. If the determination standby flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3401 in FIG. 55, so the remaining ball determination in steps S3407 and S3408 is not performed even if the determination standby time has elapsed. That is, if a winning occurs in the operating ports 38, 39 while waiting for determination (if the first opening/closing execution mode occurs), the remaining ball determination is not executed (cancelled).

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game related to the first opening/closing execution mode will be explained. In this embodiment, the game flow differs depending on the case where the waiting time B for opening the shutter has elapsed without the first opening/closing execution mode occurring, and the case where the first opening/closing execution mode has occurred before the waiting time B has elapsed. are different. Here, first, a case where the first opening/closing execution mode does not occur will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 56. It is assumed that 2 seconds is selected as the open standby time.

When a winning occurs in the operating ports 38 and 39 at timing t81, the shutter 221 is switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t82 after the waiting time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed. After the shutter 221 is maintained in the open state for 0.3 seconds, it is switched to the closed state again.

At timing t83 when the opening standby time (2 sec) has elapsed from the winning to the operating ports 38 and 39 (timing t81), the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. After the second distribution member 310 maintains the distribution state for 0.3 seconds, it is switched to the non-distribution state again.

When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 at timing t84, which is immediately after timing t83, the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state at this point, so the winning ball is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side. It will be done. At this time, since the shutter 221 is in a closed state, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 are stored in the entrance guide section 215.

Thereafter, when the first opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t85, a waiting time B (5 seconds) for opening the shutter is set. Then, at timing t86 when the standby time B has elapsed, the shutter 221 is switched to the open state and the storage of game balls is released. As a result, the storage release ball starts moving toward the V winning sensor 192, and passes the V winning sensor 192 about 2 seconds later. However, since the first opening/closing execution mode has ended at the time of passing the V winning sensor 192, it is not treated as a V winning.

Next, a case where the first opening/closing execution mode occurs before the standby time B has elapsed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 57. Note that the flow up to timing t85 when the first opening/closing execution mode ends is the same as in the case of FIG. 56, so a description thereof will be omitted.

When the first opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t85, the waiting time B (5 seconds) for opening the shutter is set, as already explained. When a winning occurs in the actuating ports 38, 39 at timing t86', which is a timing before the waiting time B has elapsed, the waiting time B is cleared. As a result, the scheduled opening of the shutter 221 at timing t90', which is the timing at which the standby time B has elapsed, is disabled.

At timing t87' when a waiting time A (0.5 sec) has elapsed from timing t86', the shutter 221 is switched to the open state and the storage of game balls is released. Further, at timing t88' when the opening standby time (2 sec) has elapsed from timing t86', the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched to the open state and the first opening/closing execution mode is started. Here, the execution period of the first opening/closing execution mode is 4 seconds (the total time of the opening time of 0.5 sec and the waiting time at the end of 3.5 sec), and the storage release ball is in the first opening/closing execution mode. After approximately 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start, it passes the V winning sensor 192. That is, during execution of the first opening/closing execution mode started from timing t88', the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192, and a V winning occurs (timing t89'). This causes a transition to the second opening/closing execution mode.

In this way, if the first opening/closing execution mode occurs before the waiting time B has elapsed, the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 in the previous first opening/closing execution mode will be used to execute the later first opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to generate a V winning prize in the mode. That is, if a game ball is placed in the operating ports 38, 39 within the waiting time B, the second opening/closing execution mode will occur, so during the waiting time B, the transition to the second opening/closing execution mode will occur. It will be a favorable period. This makes it possible to liven up the game after the first opening/closing execution mode ends, and to stimulate the player's desire to continue playing the game.

Although illustration is omitted in FIGS. 56 and 57, when a game ball enters the accessory device 150 in the first opening/closing execution mode from timing t83, the game ball reaches the rotating body 201 and the corresponding A V winning prize may occur in the first opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, as for the state at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode, (a) it was possible to generate a V winning, and (b) it was not possible to generate a V winning, but a game ball was placed in the accessory device 150. It is possible to create three states: (c) it was possible to store the winnings, and (c) it was not possible to generate or store V winnings. This makes it possible to improve the level of interest compared to conventional pachinko machines, which remain in two states: whether a V-win has occurred or not.

Next, the relationship between the opening standby time and the flow of the game related to the first opening/closing execution mode will be explained. First, the flow when the open standby time of 0.5 sec is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 58(a).

When a winning occurs in the operating ports 38, 39 at timing t91, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t92 after the opening waiting time (0.5 sec) has elapsed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. In addition, timing t92 is also the timing at which the waiting time A (0.5 sec) for shutter opening has elapsed after the winning occurs in the operating ports 38 and 39, so at timing t92, the shutter 221 is opened from the closed state. state can be switched.

In this way, when the opening standby time of 0.5 sec is selected, the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the shutter 221 is in the open state overlap. Then, when the game ball enters the accessory device 150 at timing t93 during the overlapping period, the game ball is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then directly to the entrance guide section. 215 and moves toward the V winning sensor 192. That is, the route leading to the V winning sensor 192 through the entrance guide section 215 functions as a route for directly passing the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 to the V winning sensor 192.

The game ball flowing down the above route reaches the V winning sensor 192 at timing t94, which is about 2 seconds after passing through the entrance guide section 215. That is, the V winning occurs in the first opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the accessory device 150 occurs.

Next, the flow when the open standby time of 2 seconds is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 58(b).

When a winning occurs in the operating ports 38 and 39 at timing t95, the opening/closing accessory 168 is switched from the closed state to the open state at timing t96 when the opening waiting time (2 seconds) has elapsed. At the same time, the second distribution member 310 is switched from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. At this time, the shutter 221 is in the closed state, and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the shutter 221 is in the open state do not overlap. Therefore, the game ball that enters the accessory device 150 at timing t97, which is immediately after timing t96, is distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310, and then comes into contact with the shutter 221 and stops. , stored in the entrance guide section 215.

In this way, depending on the opening/closing standby time, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 may win a V prize as they are, or may be stored. Of these, in the latter case, if the first opening/closing execution mode does not occur before the waiting time B elapses, it will not lead to a V winning prize, so transition to the second opening/closing execution mode is not guaranteed. Therefore, for the player, it is more advantageous for the former player to win the V prize as is. Since the configuration is such that the degree of advantage differs even if the games are distributed to the same entrance guide section 215, the players can be interested in the development of the game after the distribution, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. It becomes possible.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure for storing winning game balls in accessory device 150 is different from each of the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62.

FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment is not provided with the warp passage 210, the second distribution member 310, the shutter 221, and the V-guidance passage 260 shown in FIG. That is, all the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150 are guided to the ball sorting section 185 (see FIG. 9) and flow down either the left or right guide path 183. Note that the ball distribution section 185 always guides the game balls that have arrived at the ball distribution section 185 to the left guiding path 183, as in each of the above embodiments.

A first distribution member 300 is provided in the left guide passage 183, as in each of the embodiments described above. As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution member 300 can be operated between a non-distribution state forming a part of the floor of the guide passage 183 and a non-distribution state by controlling the drive of the first distribution drive section 300a. The distributing state is switched to a distributing state in which the distributing member 300 rotates downward with the rear end of the distributing member 300 as the rotation axis and slopes downward toward the removal passage 191b side.

When the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the game balls distributed to the left side in the guide path 183 pass over the first distribution member 300 and reach the rotating body 201. On the other hand, since the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower outlet 182b, and the game balls passing over the first distribution member 300 are rotated. Without reaching 201, it is guided directly to the removal passage 191b.

Returning to the explanation of the accessory device 150 in FIG. 59, an opening/closing member 400 is provided on the back side of the side surface of the recess 182 to open and close the removal opening 182b. The opening/closing member 400 has a substantially plate shape with a size corresponding to the opening 182b, and is movable along the side surface of the recess 182. The opening/closing member 400 is connected to an opening/closing member drive unit 400a (electromagnetic solenoid), and by driving and controlling the opening/closing member drive unit 400a, the opening/closing member 400 is in an open state in which the opening/closing port 182b is opened, and in an open state in which the opening/closing port 182b is opened. When the switch is closed, it switches to the closed state. The opening/closing member drive unit 400a is electrically controlled by a main controller 81, and is driven and controlled by a drive signal from the main controller 81.

When the opening/closing member drive section 400a is not driven (not in an excited state) and the opening/closing member 400 is in an open state, the game balls sorted to the exit opening guide section 203 by the rotary body 201 are released. It becomes possible to pass through the opening 182b and is guided to the removal passage 191b. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member driving section 400a is driven (energized state) and the opening/closing member 400 is in the closed state, even if the game ball received in the exit opening guide section 203 reaches the exit opening 182b. , cannot pass through the exit port 182b. In this case, the state in which the game balls are received by the exit guide section 203 continues, and the game balls are stored in the exit guide section 203.

Nine outlet guide parts 203 are provided, and each outlet guide part 203 is configured to be able to receive one game ball at a time. Therefore, it is possible to store nine game balls in total.

Note that the V winning opening 182a is not provided with an opening/closing mechanism such as the opening/closing member 400 and the opening/closing member drive section 400a. That is, the V winning hole 182a is always open so that game balls can pass through it. For this reason, the game balls distributed to the V winning hole guide section 204 are guided to the V winning path 191a through the V winning hole 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates. That is, the game balls accepted by the V winning hole guide section 204 are not stored after reaching the V winning hole 182a, but are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150.

Next, of the various control processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81, portions that are different from the first embodiment will be described.

As already explained, the accessory device 150 according to the present embodiment does not include the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221, so the present embodiment does not require processing related to drive control thereof. For this reason, for example, the process of driving and controlling the second distribution member 310 (step S1204 in FIG. 24, etc.) using the second distribution pattern table (FIG. 34), the process of driving and controlling the shutter 221 (such as step S1204 in FIG. 24), etc. Step S1205, step S2112 in FIG. 35, etc.) are omitted, and the configuration is such that these processes are not executed.

Setting processing for each round according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60(a). FIG. 60(a) illustrates only the parts that are different from the setting process for each round in FIG. 30, and the processes in steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. be exposed. Note that the setting process for each round is executed at the start of the round game (see step S1705 in FIG. 29).

After executing the corresponding round pattern setting process (setting process of the opening/closing pattern of each round) in step S1804, the setting process of the opening/closing member 400 is executed in step S3701. This process sets the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 in each round.

Here, the process of step S3701 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60(b). In the process of step S3701, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15". Since the value of the first round counter RC1 being "15" means the second round of the round game (the first round in the second opening/closing execution mode) (see step S1608 in FIG. 28), in step S3801, the actual Specifically, it is determined whether the round game is the second round or not.

If it is determined that the value of the first round counter RC1 is "15", that is, if it is the second round game, the process advances to step S3802, and the closed state is maintained throughout the second round game. The operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the opening/closing member 400 is maintained. That is, the game balls distributed to the exit guide section 203 in the second round game are stored in the exit guide section 203 until the second round game is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "15", the process advances to step S3803, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and "14" or less. Determine whether That is, it is determined whether the round game to be executed is one of the 3rd to 14th rounds.

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "3" or more and "14" or less, in step S3804, the game is closed until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the round game, and then a predetermined open period is set. The operating mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the opening/closing member 400 is in the open state for a period of time, and then remains in the closed state until the round game ends. Therefore, in round games from the 3rd round to the 14th round, the game balls distributed to the exit guide section 203 are stored in the exit guide section 203 until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game. After that, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state, and the storage state is released. Then, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the closed state again, and the game balls distributed to the exit exit guide section 203 are stored in the exit exit guide section 203 during the remaining period of the round game.

The predetermined period for maintaining the closed state is arbitrary as long as it is shorter than the execution period of one round of the round game, but in this embodiment, it is set to 5 seconds, for example. On the other hand, the above-mentioned opening period for maintaining the open state is also arbitrary, but if all the game balls stored in the outlet guide section 203 are to be discharged, the period should be longer than the period in which the rotating body 201 makes one revolution. There is a need. In this embodiment, when the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state, the rotational speed of the rotating body 201 is increased so that it makes one revolution in 1 second, and the opening period is set to 1.5 seconds.

If it is determined in step S3803 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not less than "3" and not less than "14", the process advances to step S3805, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2" or not. That is, it is determined whether the round game to be executed is the 15th round (the round game one before the final round).

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "2", in step S3806, the game is in a closed state until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game, and then is in an open state for a predetermined open period, Thereafter, the operating mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the open state is maintained until the end of the round game. Therefore, in the 15th round of the round game, the game balls sorted to the exit exit guide section 203 are stored in the exit exit guide section 203 until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game, and then, The storage state is released by switching the opening/closing member 400 to the open state. After that, the state in which the storage is released continues until the end of the round game, so even if game balls are distributed to the exit guide section 203, they are not stored. Note that the predetermined period in this step is arbitrary, but in this embodiment, it is set to be the same length as the predetermined period in step S3804.

If it is determined in step S3806 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "2", it means that the round game to be executed is the 16th round (last round). In this case, in step S3807, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so as to maintain the open state throughout the 16th round game. That is, the game balls distributed to the exit guide section 203 in the 16th round of the round game are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 as the rotating body 201 rotates. After executing each process of steps S3802, S3804, S3806, and S3807, the setting process of the opening/closing member 400 is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for each round in FIG. 60(a), after the process of step S3701 is executed, the rotating body setting process is executed in step S3702. As already explained, this embodiment has a configuration in which the rotary body 201 is rotated at high speed in accordance with the switching of the opening/closing member 400 to the open state, and this step performs the setting process. In addition, in this embodiment, since the rotating body setting process is performed for each round, step S1609 (rotating body setting process) in the game state transition process of FIG. 28 is not executed.

In step S3702, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is greater than or equal to "2" and less than or equal to "14" (whether or not the round game to be executed is one from the 23rd round to the 15th round). If the determination is affirmative, the operating mode of the rotating body 201 is changed so that high-speed rotation is performed over a high-speed rotation period (1 sec) after a predetermined period (the same period as the above-mentioned predetermined period in step S3804) has elapsed. Set.

On the other hand, if the above determination is negative, that is, if the round game to be executed is the 2nd round or the 16th round, the normal rotation speed (one round in 5 seconds) is maintained throughout the round game. The operating mode of the rotating body 201 is set. After executing step S3702, step S1805 in FIG. 30 (processing for setting the upper limit number of winnings to the accessory device 150) is executed.

Next, the round update process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) illustrate only the portions that are different from the round update process in FIG. 36. The process of step S3901 in FIG. 61(a) is performed after executing step S2206 of FIG. 36, and the process of step S3902 of FIG. 61(b) is performed after executing step S2209 of FIG. 36. Note that the round update process is performed when the number of prizes entered into the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number of prizes (9) in the round game, or when the number of openings of the opening/closing accessory 168 reaches the upper limit number (19 times). (See step S1712 in FIG. 29).

First, the closing setting process of the opening/closing member 400 in step S3901 of FIG. 61(a) will be described. This process sets the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 during the closing period (round interval) between each round. In step S3901, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the opening/closing member 400 is in the closed state throughout the above-mentioned closing period. Therefore, if game balls are stored in the exit guide part 203 at the end of the immediately preceding round, the stored state is maintained even after the transition to the closed period, and the state is carried over to the next round as it is. After executing step S3901, the process advances to step S2207 (round update command setting process) in FIG. 36.

Next, the opening setting process of the opening/closing member 400 in step S3902 of FIG. 61(b) will be explained. This process sets the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 during the ending period. In step S3902, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 400 is set so that the opening/closing member 400 is in the open state throughout the ending period. Therefore, even if game balls are stored in the exit exit guide section 203 at the end of the immediately preceding round, those stored balls are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 during the ending period. After executing step S3902, the process advances to step S2210 (ending command setting process) in FIG. 36.

Next, the processing for the action part within the accessory according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61(c). FIG. 61(c) shows only the parts that are different from the processing for the action part in the accessory in FIG. 26, and the processing in steps S4101 and S4102 in FIG. It is executed instead. Note that the processing for the action part within the accessory is executed in step S1615 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

In the processing for the action part within the accessory, if a negative determination is made in step S1401 (determination process of whether it is the control timing of the first distribution member 300), or in step S1402 (drive control process of the first distribution member 300) After executing, in step S4101, it is determined whether it is the displacement timing (control timing) of the opening/closing member 400. If it is the displacement timing, opening/closing control processing is executed in step S4102. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the opening/closing member drive section 400a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the opening/closing member driving section 400a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended and the opening/closing member 400 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the opening/closing member driving section 400a is not in the driving state, driving is started to displace the opening/closing member 400 from the open state to the closed state. If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after step S4102 is executed, the process advances to step S1407 (rotating body control process).

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the second opening/closing execution mode. Here, the third and fourth round games will be explained as examples. The description will proceed assuming that the execution mode of the second opening/closing execution mode is a continuous variation mode, and that a V winning prize occurs at some timing of the third round and the fourth round is executed.

At timing t102, when 5 seconds have passed since timing t101 when the third round game was started, the opening/closing member 400 is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the exit port 182b is opened. This state is maintained until timing t103, which is 1.5 seconds later. Further, as already explained, between timings t102 and t103, the rotating body 201 rotates at high speed so as to make one revolution in 1 sec.

Therefore, the game balls stored in the outlet guide section 203 at timing t102 are guided to the outlet 182b and discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 until timing t103. As a result, the state of the rotating body 201 at timing t103 is a state in which the game ball is not received in all nine exit guide portions 203, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to accept game balls.

Then, at timing t103, the opening/closing member 400 is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the release port 182b is closed. As a result, the rotary body 201 becomes in a state where it is possible to store the game balls distributed to the outlet guide section 203. Such a state continues until timing t106 when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fourth round. Therefore, if game balls are stored in the exit guide section 203 at timing t104 when the third round ends, this will be carried over at timing t105 when the fourth round starts.

At timing t104, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), if game balls are stored in the four outlet guide parts 203, these outlet guide parts 203 are in a state where they are blocked by the storage balls. Therefore, it becomes impossible to accept new game balls. Therefore, at timing t105 when the fourth round starts, the total number of ball guide sections 202 that can accept game balls is six, including the V winning hole guide section 204. As a result, the V winning rate (the probability that the game balls that have reached the rotating body 201 are distributed to the V winning hole guide section 204) at the start of the fourth round is 1/6.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(c), for example, many of the game balls that have won in the accessory device 150 are sorted to the exit port 182b by the first distribution member 300, and the exit port for storing the game balls. If the number of guide sections 203 remains at one, the total number of ball guide sections 202 that can accept game balls becomes nine at timing t105 when the fourth round starts. The V winning rate in this case is 1/9, which is lower than in the case of FIG. 62(b).

Thus, in this embodiment, the degree of advantage at the start of the fourth round changes depending on the number of game balls distributed to the exit guide section 203 after timing t103 of the third round. Therefore, the period A from timing t103 to t104 is a period for increasing the number of exit guide sections 203 in which game balls are stored in order to advantageously start the fourth round.

Then, period B from timing t105 when the fourth round starts to timing t106 when the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state is a period in which the player aims to win the V prize while benefiting from the savings accumulated in period A. Also in period B, if game balls are sorted to the vacant exit guide section 203, the game balls are stored in the guide section 203. As a result, the total number of ball guide sections 202 that can accept game balls is further reduced, and the proportion occupied by the V winning hole guide section 204 becomes higher. Therefore, in period B, the closer the timing t106 when the period ends, the higher the V winning rate becomes and the more likely V winnings occur.

It should be noted that if the V winnings become too simple, the significance of providing the continuous variation mode will be lost, and the charm of the V winnings will be reduced. For this reason, it may be desirable that it is difficult to win a V prize to some extent. As a countermeasure, for example, increasing the number of exit guide parts 203 in the rotating body 201, or increasing the number of exit guide parts 203 in the first exit guide part 203, etc. It is possible to increase the number. However, in these cases, the structures of the rotating body 201 and the exit guide portion 203 become complicated, which may increase the burden of designing accessories. In this regard, in this embodiment, since the first distribution member 300 reduces the number of game balls heading toward the rotating body 201, the number of exit guide parts 203 and the number of game balls directed to the first exit guide part 203 are reduced. The number of balls accepted can be kept small. This makes it possible to maintain a certain level of difficulty in winning a prize while simplifying the configurations of the rotating body 201 and exit guide portion 203.

When the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state at timing t106, this state is maintained for 1.5 seconds. As a result, storage of game balls is released, and the state of the rotating body 201 becomes a state in which no game balls are received in all nine outlet guide portions 203, as shown in FIG. 62(a).

At that time, a configuration may be adopted in which notification indicating the timing of releasing the storage and the period up to the timing is performed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, the speaker section 64, etc. For example, when notifying with the symbol display device 51, it is preferable to perform a specific display at the timing of release of storage, or to display the above-mentioned period at the start of a round or at a round interval immediately before that, or at a predetermined timing after the start of a round. Further, for example, a countdown display, a level gauge, or the like may be used to indicate a change in the remaining time, or a notification indicating the elapsed time from the start of the round may be provided. Control regarding these notifications can be performed by the display control device 100 that controls the symbol display device 51 and the production control device 82 that controls the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64.

At timing t107, which is 1.5 seconds after timing t106, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the closed state, and this state is maintained until timing t108 when the fourth round ends. For this reason, timings t107 to t108 are period A for increasing the number of exit exit guide portions 203 in which game balls are stored in order to make the fifth round advantageous, as in the case of timings t103 to t104.

After that, the 5th round game is played in the same way as the 4th round, and from then on, the first half of the round game is period B where you benefit from the previous round, and the second half is the period where you save money for the next round. The round game, which is a period A in which the number is increased, is repeated until the 14th round.

Incidentally, if the V winning does not occur during the period B from timing t105 to t106, the player has no choice but to aim for the V winning during the period A from timing t107 to t108. As mentioned above, at timing t107, the storage up to that point is reset, so it is assumed that the V winning rate in period A will be lower than that in period B. That is, by setting the storage release timing in the middle of a round game, it is possible to switch from a state in which it is easy to win a V prize to a state in which it is difficult to win a V prize in a round game. In this way, since the period in which V winnings are given preferential treatment is limited to the middle of the round game, it is possible to proceed with the round game with the feeling of tension that the preferential treatment period may end without the V winnings occurring, Interest level improves.

By the way, in order to satisfy the continuation condition in the round game, it is enough for the game ball to pass the V winning sensor 192 once, and there is no need to make it pass repeatedly. Further, unlike the winning opening guide section 203, the V winning opening guide section 204 does not store game balls. Therefore, even if the game balls are distributed to the V winning hole guide section 204 again after the V winning occurs, there is no reward for the player beyond receiving the payout of the game balls. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the exit guide section 203 after the V winning occurs, there is an advantage that not only the game balls are paid out, but also storage occurs and the next round game becomes advantageous.

That is, in the present embodiment, before a V winning occurs, the V winning opening guide section 204 is more advantageous than the outgoing opening guiding section 203, but after a V winning occurs, the V winning opening guiding section 204 is more advantageous. The exit guide portion 203 is also advantageous. In other words, the advantageous relationship is reversed when the V winning occurs as a boundary, and it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience that has not been seen before. Moreover, with this configuration, two games, a game aiming at distribution to the V winning opening guide section 204 and a game aiming at distribution to the losing opening guide section 203, can be realized in one round game. This makes it possible to improve the level of interest compared to conventional pachinko machines, which only guarantee the former.

Next, the flow of the second round game will be explained. In the second opening/closing execution mode, the round game of the second round, which is the first round, cannot start the round game in an advantageous state because there is no carrying over (storage) of game balls from the previous round game. Therefore, in the second round, unlike the third to fourteenth rounds, the opening/closing member 400 is not switched to the open state during the round game, and the storage is not released. Therefore, in the second round game, game balls can be stored in the exit guide section 203 using the entire round game. This increases the V winning rate in the second round and prevents the second opening/closing execution mode from ending early. In addition, since the game balls stored in the second round are taken over as they are in the third round, the game can be played particularly advantageously during period B of the third round.

Next, the flow of round games for the 15th and 16th rounds will be explained. As already explained, in the 15th round, the opening/closing member 400 is switched to the open state during the round game, but thereafter it is not returned to the closed state and is maintained in the open state until the end of the round. Therefore, in the 15th round, after the first half period B ends, no game balls are stored thereafter. Furthermore, in the 16th round, the opening/closing member 400 is maintained in the open state throughout the round game, so no accumulation occurs throughout the round game.

This is because the upper limit round in the second opening/closing execution mode is set to 16 rounds, so even if a V-win occurs in the 16th round, the next round will not be held, and the second half of the 15th round and the 16th round will be held. This is because there is little significance in storing game balls. Additionally, if the balls remain in the accessory device 150 even after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes difficult to secure the timing for determining the remaining balls, but with the above configuration, the timing for determining the remaining balls is ensured. It becomes easier to do.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the remaining ball determination is performed at the end of the ending. In this case, the present embodiment is configured to keep the opening/closing member 400 open during the ending period. As a result, not only when the round game reaches the 16th round, but also when it ends in the middle of the round (for example, the 5th round), at the end of the ending (when executing the remaining ball determination), the accessory device All the game balls within 150 can be ejected, and it becomes possible to appropriately determine the remaining balls.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The game balls distributed to the exit guide part 203 in the accessory device 150 can be stored, and the stored balls increase the V winning rate in the next round game. This makes it possible to play the game in conjunction with subsequent round games, making it possible to improve the level of interest compared to conventional pachinko machines in which the games are independent for each round game.

Furthermore, the following effects are expected by utilizing the outlet guide section 203 as a storage section. Normally, when game balls are sorted into the receiving section for dislodgement, the player only feels disappointed, but in this embodiment, when the game balls are sorted into the dislodgement opening guide section 203, there is a benefit to the player. Therefore, the exit guide part 203 is recognized as a useful receiving part. Thereby, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that the player can enjoy regardless of whether the game balls are distributed to either the V winning opening guide part 204 or the winning opening guiding part 203, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's desire to play. In addition, since the exit guide part 203, which has conventionally been recognized as only a disadvantage, functions as a receiving part that increases the advantage, it is possible to add surprise and give a fresh impression to the player. become.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the rotating body 201, the first distribution member 300, and the second distribution member 310 are provided as various distribution means, but the configuration for distributing game balls is arbitrary. Further, the present invention is not limited to a dynamic distribution structure, and may be a static distribution structure such as a distribution passageway or a croon.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls stored in the entrance guide section 215 or the exit guide section 203 are configured to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but may be configured to be invisible. In this case, it is not clear from the player's point of view whether or not there is a reserve, and it is possible to add the fun of guessing.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, a game ball that wins a prize in the accessory device 150 in one specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) wins a V prize in the next specific game. Although the configuration is such that the light passes through the sensor 192, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, starting from a specific game in which a game ball wins in the accessory device 150, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the specific game one after another. In short, any configuration is sufficient as long as the winning balls in the previous specific game pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the specific game executed later.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of balls entering the accessory device 150 and the number of balls ejected from the accessory device 150 are managed by one counter (remaining ball counter RPC). A first counter for keeping track of the number of balls ejected and a second counter for keeping track of the number of balls ejected may be provided, and the configuration may be such that the number of entering balls and the number of balls ejected are managed separately. In this case, the remaining ball determination can be performed based on determining whether the values of the first counter and the second counter match.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, a waiting time at the end is provided in each round game in the second opening/closing execution mode, but it may be configured such that this is not provided, or the waiting time at the end is set in the game in which the accessory device 150 wins. The time may be shorter than the time it takes for the ball to be discharged from the accessory device 150. With these configurations, game balls other than the game balls stored in the entrance guide section 215 or the exit guide section 203 can also be carried over to the next round. However, even if the final winning ball in a round game (a game ball that won just before the accessory device 150 is closed) passes the V winning sensor 192, the passage will be after the end of the round game, and the V winning will be invalidated. Considering the possibility that such a situation may occur, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

Further, in a configuration in which a waiting time at the end is provided, the waiting time at the end may be set only when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number of winnings. According to this configuration, for example, when the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened reaches the upper limit number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened (however, only when reaching the upper limit number of winnings does not occur at the same time), the round game is promptly ended. This makes it possible to shorten the waiting time until the next round of games.

Furthermore, in a configuration that provides a waiting time at the end, when the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit number of winnings, it is determined whether a V winning has occurred (or whether the continuation condition is satisfied). is determined, and if a V winning has already occurred, a configuration may be adopted in which no waiting time is provided at the end (the waiting time at the end is set to 0 sec). This is because if the V winning ball has already occurred, there is little point in waiting to see whether the final winning ball passes the V or not.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when a V winning occurs in the first opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing execution mode may be terminated based on the occurrence of the V winning. Thereby, the second opening/closing execution mode can be started without waiting for the end waiting time to elapse, and smooth progress of the game can be promoted. In this case, it is preferable to perform the remaining ball determination after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the first opening/closing execution mode. At this time, by setting the predetermined period to a period shorter than the opening period of the second opening/closing execution mode, the remaining ball determination can be completed during the execution of the opening, and interference with the remaining ball determination for the second opening/closing execution mode can be avoided. It can be suppressed. Further, it may be configured such that the remaining ball determination is not performed for the first opening/closing execution mode in which a V winning has occurred, and is performed together with the second opening/closing execution mode.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the structure is such that the symbols are displayed variably on at least one of the main display section 43 and the symbol display device 51 based on winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39, in other words, the lottery process is performed. The variable display may be started based on the result of the lottery process, and a game round may be executed in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is displayed and the variable display is ended. In this case, after starting the variable display based on winnings in the operating ports 38 and 39, the variable display may be caused to continue for the same period as the opening standby time, and then the symbols may be stopped and displayed. The display mode of the picture (stop display result) in the case of stop display may correspond to the result of the lottery process (see FIG. 12) performed based on winnings in the actuating ports 38 and 39.

(8) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is assumed that the reservation information is acquired based on winnings to the respective operating ports 38 and 39, and that the reservation information is stored up to a predetermined number (four each). Although described above, a configuration may also be adopted in which no reservation information is stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, an example has been described in which the number of pending information based on winnings to each operating port 38, 39 is stored with an upper limit of four, but less than three. There may be five or more pieces, or the upper limit storage number of reservation information based on winnings to each operating port 38, 39 may be different.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the number of pending information is displayed by the pending light emitting units 54 to 56, but it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Since the symbol display device 51 is configured to be provided on the upper part of the accessory device 150, the player can move the game ball around the accessory device 150, such as winning a prize on the accessory device 150 and subsequently winning a V prize. If the number of pending information is displayed in a location near the location of such interest (i.e., display screen G), it will naturally come into view. it is conceivable that. In this way, compared to a configuration in which separate notifications are made using various locations, information can be consolidated, and the game can be made easier to understand. However, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the type is notified on the display screen G, and if the number of pending items is notified on the display screen G, then the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode. When notifying the type, the display of the information on the number of items on hold is either erased, or the type of opening/closing execution mode is notified while the information on the number on hold is left. In the former case, there may be an inconvenience in that it is not possible to check the number of pending information while the type of opening/closing execution mode is being announced, and in the latter case, the production area may become smaller. Therefore, there is a problem that the notification itself of the type of opening/closing execution mode may become unremarkable. Therefore, for example, if the configuration is such that the number of pending information is displayed on the display screen G while having the pending light emitting sections 54 to 56, even if the display of the number of pending information is erased on the display screen G, This can be checked using the hold light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed in accordance with the timing.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired as the pending information when a prize is won to the operating ports 38 and 39, and the type of opening/closing execution mode (jackpot type) is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. Although the configuration is configured to determine the type of opening/closing execution mode, it may be configured to obtain a counter for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode at the time of winning a V prize, and determining the type of opening/closing execution mode based on the counter. In this way, even though a V-win has not occurred, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring a counter used for a V-win when a win is entered into the actuating ports 38 and 39, simplifying the processing configuration. It is possible to aim for However, for example, when determining the opening/closing pattern, there is a configuration that reflects the type of opening/closing execution mode at the time of V winning, in detail, for example, for a 16R jackpot, the V winning rate is increased/lowered, and for an 8R jackpot, the V winning rate is increased/lowered. In the case of a configuration in which the V winning rate is increased/decreased, it is preferable to acquire a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode as pending information. In addition, when performing opening/closing control or pre-reading notification, there is a configuration that notifies the type of opening/closing execution mode when a V prize is won during opening/closing control corresponding to the pending information (for example, "If you win here, it's a 16R jackpot!!") Display, etc.), it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of opening/closing execution mode is acquired as pending information.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the mode of support by the electric accessory 39a is set to be the same, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the mode of support is different. In detail, for example, when comparing a situation in which game balls continue to be launched in a similar manner to a game area as a support mode, the electric accessory 39a of the second actuation port 39 opens per unit period. A low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the state is relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). , In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening period of one time is also set to be longer. ing. In this case, in the case where the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 39a is opened multiple times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is The period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period (i.e., The duration of one display on the accessory display section 44 is set to be short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 39 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 will be in the open state increases, and the probability of winning a V prize (occurrence of a jackpot) also increases.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the electric utility role per unit period than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, a lottery for opening electric utility objects. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in . In addition, the number of openings may be increased, the opening period may be lengthened, and the period of time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery may be shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying one or any combination of the following conditions: shortening the average period of the guarantee period and increasing the probability of winning. .

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided as in each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 themselves are not provided. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, based on the occurrence of a V winning to the accessory device 150, the transition is made to the second opening/closing execution mode, and in the opening/closing execution mode, a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs. Although the configuration is such that the second opening/closing execution mode can be executed easily, the second opening/closing execution mode may be configured to be executed by another winning device. For example, a variable ball entry device capable of shifting between an open state where a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a closed state where the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter is provided separately from the accessory device 150. The main controller 81 controls the variable ball entry device to be in an open state based on the occurrence of a V-winning on the accessory device.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 are always guaranteed to win a V prize. Good too.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has won into the accessory device 150 is discharged to the outside of the accessory device through the V winning passage 191a or the losing passage 191b, and the discharged game ball is discharged to a not-illustrated discharge. Although the configuration has been described in which the cartridges are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the passage, a configuration may also be adopted in which the cartridges are discharged to the gaming area as an external part of the accessory device.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the power is restored without operating the RAM erase switch 98a from the game stop state based on abnormality detection, the abnormality detection state and the game stop state are canceled; It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not done. In this case, a release switch for canceling the abnormality detection state and the game stop state is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and when the power is restored while an attendant of the game parlor operates the release switch, the main controller 81 It is preferable to have a configuration in which the abnormality detection state and the game stop state are canceled. Thereby, when the power is restored by operating only the power switch 92b, the gaming stopped state can be continued even after the power is restored.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the prize ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the winning sensor 192, but the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the missing sensor 193. It is also possible to have a configuration in which prize balls are paid out based on this. However, in consideration of the time lag from the occurrence of winning to the accessory device 150 until the prize ball is paid out, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the accessory device 150 is provided with the opening/closing accessory 168, but it may be configured so that it can enter the ball without the opening/closing accessory 168. In this case, the accessory device is, for example, "a specific area provided in the gaming area and into which game balls can enter" or "a specific area provided in the gaming area and divided into areas into which game balls can enter". It can be expressed as

(19) Each of the above embodiments can also be applied to the following configurations. For example, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a lottery based on winning in either of the operating ports 38, 39 causes a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (so-called jackpot game) (jackpot result)) The lottery mode of the lottery process is a low probability mode in which the probability of a lottery result that causes a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined probability, and the above-mentioned lottery mode. In a gaming machine equipped with a high probability mode in which the lottery result is higher than the low probability mode, when the variable ball entry device is opened during the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball passes through the V winning hole 182a (V By winning a prize), the gaming state may shift to a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (so-called V-probability changing machine). Further, although the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments corresponds to a gaming machine called a so-called two-type pachinko machine, the configuration of each embodiment is applied to a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type gaming machine. It's okay.

(20) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the warp passage 210 is arranged behind the rotating body 201, but it may be arranged on the side or in front of the rotating body 201. However, when placed laterally, the width dimension of the accessory device 150 tends to increase, leading to a narrowing of the flow area of the game ball outside the accessory device. Considering this point, it is preferable to arrange it at the front or rear where the space in the front and back direction is utilized. However, if it is placed in the front, the visibility of the rotating body 201, which is of great interest to the player, will be hindered, so it is preferable to place it in the rear as in the above embodiment. In this case, it does not necessarily have to be directly behind, but may be diagonally backward.

(21) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the warp passage 210 is provided to guide the game balls stored in the accessory device 150 to the V winning sensor 192 without passing through the rotating body 201. However, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls stored in the accessory device 150 are guided to the rotating body 201. In this case, the rotating body 201 is stopped at a predetermined position where the storage release balls can be distributed to the V winning hole guide section 204 (for example, a position where the V winning hole guide section 204 faces the extracting section 186) in accordance with the timing of releasing the storage. With this configuration, it is possible to stabilize the V winning rate of the balls released from storage.

However, since it is necessary to control the movement of the rotating body 201 in consideration of both the game balls that are not stored and go to the rotating body 201 and the game balls that are stored and go to the rotating body 201, the control becomes complicated. There is a possibility that the processing load on the main control device 81 will increase. Also, considering that the game balls that are not stored and go to the rotating body 201 and the game balls that are stored and go to the rotating body 201 may interfere, and one may inhibit the other from winning a V prize, each game ball It is preferable that the routes leading to the V winning sensor 192 are independent. Considering these points, it is preferable to use the above embodiment.

Further, when the game ball stored in the accessory device 150 is guided to the rotating body 201, the rotating body 201 may be rotated normally. In this case, an increase in processing load due to complication of operation control can be avoided. However, the number of game balls heading toward the rotating body 201 only increases by the amount of storage, and it does not make it much easier to win a prize. As a result, storage becomes less attractive and there is less motivation to pursue storage. From this point of view, the above embodiment is preferable.

(22) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the game balls are stored in a stopped state, but a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls are stored while moving. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a circulation path is provided in which the game balls that have entered the accessory device 150 are circulated without being discharged from the accessory device 150, and the game balls are stored by moving within the circulation path. In this case, there is provided a deriving part that can lead the game balls moving in the circulation path to the V winning sensor 192, and a sorting means that distributes the game balls in the circulation path to the derivation part side and to the side that continues to move the circulation path. It is a good idea to provide . By controlling the distribution timing of the distribution means (timing of distribution to the deriving unit side), storage can be released at an appropriate timing.

(23) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the period from when the storage of the stored balls is released until the storage released balls reach the V winning sensor 192 is a fixed period (about 2 seconds). However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the above-mentioned period is diversified (a configuration in which the passing timing of the V winning prize sensor 192 differs even if the storage release timing is the same).

For example, the above-mentioned period is configured such that at least a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period occur, and in the first period, the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game, and the second period is longer than the first period. During the period, the V winning sensor 192 can be configured to be passed after the end of the next round game. When the storage release ball passes the V winning sensor 192 after the end of the next round game, it may be configured to pass the V winning sensor 192 at the round interval between the next round game, or It may be configured to pass through the winning sensor 192. In the former case, no V-winning will occur due to the balls released from storage, and in the latter case, the execution of the next round is confirmed. In addition, it may be configured such that in the case of the first period, the storage release ball passes through the V winning sensor 192 before the start of the next round game, and in the case of the second period, it passes through the V winning sensor 192 in the next round game. . In these cases, since the subsequent game development by the balls whose storage has been released is randomized, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game balls whose storage has been released.

As a configuration for diversifying the period until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, a period variable means such as a croon may be provided between the storage section and the V winning sensor 192. Further, instead of the clone, a plurality of ball paths having different path lengths up to the V winning sensor 192 and a distribution means for distributing game balls released from storage to the plurality of ball paths may be provided.

(24) In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the game balls are stored in the accessory device 150, but the game balls do not necessarily need to be stored. For example, by providing a travel path that takes a long time to reach the V winning sensor 192 and moving within the travel path, the game ball that won the accessory device 150 in a previous specific game (round game, etc.) It may be configured to pass through the V winning sensor 192 in a later specific game.

(25) In the first to sixth embodiments, one game ball can be stored, but a plurality of game balls can be stored.

(26) In the first embodiment, the storage is released at the end of the round game, but the storage may be released before the end. Further, storage may be released after the start of the next round game, or storage may be released during the closing time (round interval) between each round. In short, it is sufficient that the game balls that won in the previous round game can pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the subsequent round game, and the timing for releasing the storage is arbitrary. However, if the storage is released after the start of the next round game, the player will not only be able to release the storage, but will also be able to determine whether the game ball will win in the accessory device 150 or whether the winning ball will win a V prize. You need to be more careful, and you become hectic. For this reason, it is easy to miss the release of storage, and in light of this, it is preferable to release the storage at the round interval, at the end or at the end of a round game where the game has settled down.

(27) In the first embodiment, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state in the first opening/closing execution mode, and the game ball is not guided to the entrance guide section 215 (warp passage 210) side. However, the second distribution member 310 may be driven to switch between the distribution state and the non-distribution state, and the game balls may be distributed to the entrance guide portion 215 side. In this case, if the shutter 221 is further left open, the game ball can pass through the entrance guide section 215 and use the warp passage 210 as a direct V route.

(28) In the first embodiment, it may be configured such that whether or not game balls can be stored during a round game differs depending on the type of jackpot. For example, a configuration may be provided in which jackpot A and jackpot B are provided, and in the case of jackpot A, it is possible to store game balls during a round game, and in the case of jackpot B, it is impossible. Further, the round or number of rounds in which game balls can be stored may be configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot.

(29) In the second embodiment, the second distribution member 310 is maintained in a non-distribution state in the 5th round, the 10th round, and the 16th round so that winning balls are not stored. However, the shutter 221 may be maintained in the open state while the second distribution member 310 is switched between the distribution state and the non-distribution state. In this case, the game balls distributed to the entrance guide section 215 side by the second distribution member 310 pass through the V winning sensor 192 via the warp passage 210 without being stored in the entrance guide section 215. . In other words, the distributed game balls are not carried over to the next round game, but pass through the V winning sensor 192 in the round game in which a winning occurs.

(30) In the second embodiment, instead of or in addition to the 5th, 10th, and 16th rounds, the round (15th round) immediately before the upper limit round (16th round) cannot be stored. A configuration may also be adopted in which a round is set and the remaining ball determination is performed in response to the end of the previous round. Even if a game ball wins a V in the upper limit round, the next round will not be executed, and there is little merit in storing game balls in the previous round.However, with the above configuration, the player's profits can be increased. It becomes possible to perform remaining ball determination during a jackpot without damaging the ball.

(31) In the third embodiment, the execution timing of remaining ball determination is set based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game, but it may be set based on the elapsed time from the release timing of storage. . In this case, if the period from the release of storage to the execution of remaining ball determination is made longer than the period until the storage release ball reaches the V winning sensor 192, the storage release ball can be removed from the accessory device 150. After being ejected, a remaining ball determination can be performed.

(32) The following configuration may be used instead of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment described above, while it is possible to determine the remaining balls for each round, winnings to the accessory device 150 are restricted by the short opening mode, giving the player the impression that winnings are difficult to occur. There is a risk of giving. Therefore, first of all, a configuration is adopted in which the short opening mode is not executed. Then, a second retention means capable of retaining the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 in the accessory device 150 and a second retention release means for releasing the retention are connected to the entrance guide portion 215 and the second retention means that releases the retention. It is provided separately from the shutter 221, and a round game is started in a state where the game balls can be retained in the second retention means, and the retention is canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Further, an entrance sensor 179 is provided downstream of the second retention means, so that the game balls retained by the second retention means are not counted as winnings (not detected by the entrance sensor 179). In this case, if the configuration is such that "the storage-released ball passes the V-winning sensor 192 and the remaining ball determination (remaining ball determination is made after the storage-released ball wins the V-win)" is performed, then the The remaining ball counter RPC is updated based on the winning of the game ball after the remaining ball determination is executed. In other words, it is possible to allow winnings to the accessory device 150 while avoiding interference with remaining ball determination, and it is possible to make the player feel that it is difficult to win a prize while making it possible to determine remaining balls for each round. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in the said structure, a 2nd retention means may be provided in the upstream side of the entrance guide part 215 and the shutter 221, and may be provided in the downstream side. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a short opening mode in the said structure. In this case, it is possible to suppress the discrepancy between the number of prizes won and the number of discharged prizes when a prize is won in the short opening mode.

(33) In the fourth embodiment, the storage is canceled based on the number of prizes entered into the accessory device 150 reaching a specific number (eight), but the storage is canceled based on the elapsed time from the start of the round game. It may also be configured to cancel. In this case, it is possible to cope with the case where winnings to the accessory device 150 do not occur easily and the round game ends before the number of winnings reaches the specified number. Note that in the fourth embodiment, the specific number is 8 (one less than the upper limit number of winnings), but the specific number is arbitrary; for example, the upper limit number of winnings may be the specific number. .

(34) In the fourth embodiment, the special storage release is performed only in the second round game, but it may be performed in a round game other than the second round. In this case, it may be performed in all rounds or in some rounds. In the latter case, after predetermining the round to be executed for special storage release, when executing the second opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether the round game is the predetermined round or not, and an affirmative determination is made. It is preferable to control the operation of the shutter 221 so that when the determination is made, special storage release is performed. This allows some rounds to be given preferential treatment. In this case, different notifications may be made depending on when a round with such preferential treatment is executed and when a round without such preferential treatment is executed, or specific notification may be configured only in the former case. These notifications may be made as a display effect on the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting section 63, or may be made as an audio effect on the speaker section 64.

(35) In the fifth embodiment, when a specific round is executed, game balls can be stored for a predetermined period after the second opening/closing execution mode ends, and the specific round is not executed. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which it is impossible to store game balls after the second opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, a chance to win consecutive games in the second opening/closing execution mode can be provided as a benefit when the round game is continued until a specific round. This adds the game goal of continuing the second opening/closing execution mode until a specific round, making the second opening/closing execution mode more interesting. The specific rounds are not particularly limited, but are preferably fewer rounds (for example, 10 rounds) than the upper limit rounds (16 rounds). In this case, it becomes possible for the player to set the gaming goal in stages, such as continuing at least until a specific round, preferably continuing until the upper limit round.

In addition, if a specific round is executed, it becomes impossible to store game balls after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, and if a specific round is not executed, a predetermined period of time after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode. It may also be configured such that game balls can be stored over a period of time. In this case, as a relief when the second opening/closing execution mode ends after a small number of rounds, it is possible to provide a chance of consecutive games in the second opening/closing execution mode. Although the specific rounds in this case are also arbitrary, it is preferable to set the number of rounds to about four, for example, in order to prevent intentional termination in the middle of a round.

Note that switching between storage availability and non-storage can be performed, for example, by controlling the operating mode of the shutter 221 during the ending period. Specifically, if storage is possible, the shutter 221 may be in a closed state during the ending period, and if storage is not possible, the shutter 221 may be in an open state during the ending period.

(36) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration may be such that whether or not game balls can be stored after the second opening/closing execution mode is completed depends on the type of jackpot. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which jackpot A and jackpot B are provided, and in the case of jackpot A, the above-mentioned storage is possible, and in the case of jackpot B, the above-mentioned storage is impossible.

In this case, different notifications may be given when jackpot A is executed and when jackpot B is executed, or specific notification may be configured only for the former. These notifications may be made as a display effect on the symbol display device 51 or the display light emitting section 63, or may be made as an audio effect on the speaker section 64. In addition, when the jackpot type is sorted based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, which jackpot type will be assigned is determined when a winning occurs in the actuation openings 38 and 39 or when the hold is exhausted. It becomes possible to understand. In this case, the above-mentioned notification may be performed not only in the second opening/closing execution mode but also in the first opening/closing execution mode or during its opening standby time.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, when there is a hold at a specific timing during the second opening/closing execution mode, the hold information that is held and the opening standby time corresponding to the hold information are read in advance ( The system may also be configured to identify the pending pending information and its corresponding release waiting time at a timing before the pending information is subject to lottery processing such as determination of validity), and to notify based on the pre-read results. good. For example, if the opening waiting time of 2.5 seconds during which consecutive winnings are expected is predicted, a special notification (for example, "Jackpot If there are balls in stock at the end of the game, you have a chance to win consecutive games!'' etc.).

In this case, before the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, the player can understand that it will be advantageous if there is a reserve at the end and that there is a high possibility of winning consecutive games. 2 The desire to end the open/close execution mode increases. Thereby, the importance of the final round can be increased, and it becomes possible to enjoy the second opening/closing execution mode until the end. Further, since the reservation information allows the user to read ahead, it is possible to increase the motivation to create a reservation.

Note that if an open standby time of 0.5 seconds is read in advance with little chance of success, a notification different from the above-mentioned special notification may be made, or a configuration may be adopted in which no notification is made in particular. Further, the pre-reading of the reservation information may be performed by the main control device 81, or may be performed by a control device other than the main control device 81 (such as the production control device 82).

(38) In the fifth embodiment, the period from the end of the second opening/closing execution mode until the storage is released is standardized, but one period is selected from a plurality of periods having different lengths. By doing so, the period until storage release may be varied. For example, a lottery process may be executed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the period may be determined based on the result. If the period until the storage is released is varied, it becomes difficult to predict whether the second opening/closing execution mode will be used consecutively, which increases the sense of tension until the storage is actually released, and improves the interest. In addition, by randomizing the release timing of storage, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming to win a prize at the operating ports 38 and 39 according to the release timing (if there is no pending information at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode) ), it becomes easier to ensure the fairness of gaming.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification indicating the period until storage release may be performed at a specific timing (for example, at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode). In this case, since the timing of releasing the storage can be predicted, it becomes possible to increase the motivation to generate the first opening/closing execution mode in accordance with the timing. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the storage is released. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned predetermined notification is not performed. In this case, since it is difficult to predict the timing of release of storage, it is expected that the player will continue to watch the stored balls until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, if there is hold information at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, notification is made based on the relationship between the open standby time corresponding to the hold information and the selected period until storage release. You can also use it as For example, in the relationship between the two, if the second opening/closing execution mode occurs consecutively or there is a high possibility of it happening (if the storage release ball can or easily passes through the V winning sensor 192 during the first opening/closing execution mode), It is good to make a special announcement (for example, ``If you can stock up on balls at the end of the jackpot game, it's a great chance!''). In addition, if the second opening/closing execution mode does not occur consecutively, or if there is a high possibility of this happening (if the storage release ball is unable or difficult to pass through the V prize sensor 192 during the first opening/closing execution mode), the above special notification and may perform different notifications, or may have a configuration in which no notification is performed.

Furthermore, if there is a hold at a specific timing during the second opening/closing execution mode, the held hold information and the release standby time corresponding to the hold information are read in advance, and the read-ahead result and the selected hold release time are read in advance. A configuration may also be adopted in which notification is performed based on the relationship with the period. For example, in the relationship between the two, if the second opening/closing execution mode occurs consecutively or there is a high possibility of it happening, the above-mentioned It may be configured to issue special notifications.

(39) In the sixth embodiment, the pending information is not stored even if a winning occurs at the operating ports 38, 39 during the opening standby time or the first opening/closing execution mode, but the pending information is stored. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In addition, as in the fifth embodiment, the shutter 221 is configured to be switched to the open state when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the first opening/closing execution mode (for example, the standby time A is It is also possible to omit it and set only the waiting time B). In this case, for example, 4 seconds is further set as the opening waiting time, and if it is 2 seconds, the stored ball can pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the later first opening/closing execution mode, and if it is 4 seconds, it is possible to pass through the V winning sensor 192 during the later first opening/closing execution mode. The predetermined period is set so that the balls stored inside cannot pass through the V winning sensor 192.

Then, if there is a hold at a specific timing, which is any timing from the winning to the actuating ports 38, 39 to the end of the first opening/closing execution mode, it corresponds to the held hold information or the hold information. It is preferable to use a configuration in which the opening standby time is read in advance and notification is made based on the result. For example, when the opening standby time of 2 seconds is read ahead, a special notification (for example, ``If you can stock up on balls, it will be great Chance!” etc.). In this case, the player will be able to understand that it will be advantageous if there is accumulation in the first opening/closing execution mode, so the player will be more motivated to generate accumulation, and the degree of attention to the game will be increased. It becomes possible. Further, since the reservation information allows the user to read ahead, it is possible to increase the motivation to create a reservation. In addition, when the open standby time of 4 seconds is read in advance, a notification different from the above-mentioned special notification may be made, or a configuration may be adopted in which no notification is made in particular.

(40) In the sixth embodiment, the waiting time B may be varied. Thereby, the length of the advantageous period starting after the end of the first opening/closing execution mode can be diversified, and the degree of advantage can be varied. In that case, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined notification indicating the standby time B (period until release of storage) is performed at a specific timing (for example, at the end of the first opening/closing execution mode). In this case, since the timing of releasing the storage can be predicted, it becomes possible to increase the motivation to generate the first opening/closing execution mode in accordance with the timing. At this time, a countdown display or the like may be performed based on the remaining time until the storage is released. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned predetermined notification is not performed. In this case, since it is difficult to predict the timing of release of storage, it is expected that the player will continue to watch the stored balls until the storage is released, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

(41) In the seventh embodiment, the winning balls to the accessory device 150 are distributed to the exit exit guide section 203, and the game balls are stored in the exit exit guide section 203, which is an advantageous configuration. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a specific receiving section (accepting section different from the exit opening guide section 203 and the V winning opening guide section 204) provided in the accessory device 150 or a specific passing section (the exiting sensor 193 and the V winning opening sensor 192) By distributing the winning balls (to different passing sections), the exit opening guide section 203 may be closed (it is no longer possible to accept winning balls), or the exit exit guide section 203 may change to the V winning entrance guide section 204 and the It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of winning opening guide sections 204 increases. In addition, the configuration in which the exit exit guide section 203 changes to the V winning opening guide section 204 includes a first mode in which the game ball received in the exit exit guide section 203 is guided to the exit sensor 193, and a first mode in which the game ball is guided to the V winning sensor 192. A conceivable configuration is to provide a deriving means capable of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect, and a switching means for switching the aspect of the deriving means from the first aspect to the second aspect.

(42) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is released based on the passage of time, but the storage may be released depending on the number of prizes entered in the accessory device 150. In this case, the storage can be released based on the number of entered prizes reaching a predetermined number. For example, if winnings to the accessory device 150 do not occur easily, it is possible to store game balls in the exit exit guide section 203 without getting a sufficient opportunity to distribute them to the exit exit guide section 203 ( favorable conditions) may end. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the above state continues until the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to appropriately secure an opportunity to allocate the prizes to the exit guide section 203.

Alternatively, the storage may be released based on the occurrence of a V winning prize. In this case, the sooner the player wins the V prize, the longer the period (period A) in which the stored balls are increased for the next round, making it possible to proceed with the game more advantageously. For example, after the start of the next round game (period B), if a V winning occurs, the storage can be immediately released.

(43) In the seventh embodiment, when the storage is released, it is completely released (all the storage balls are discharged), but it is partially released (a part of the storage balls are discharged). It may also be a configuration. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a round game in which the storage is completely released and a round game in which the storage is partially released in the second opening/closing execution mode.

(44) In the seventh embodiment, as in the second embodiment, a round game in which storage is not possible may occur in the middle of the second opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the remaining ball determination can be performed in response to the end of the round game in which storage is not possible, as in the second embodiment.

(45) In the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which storage can occur at the end of the second opening/closing execution mode (storage occurs in the final round and it occurs in the ending period) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the V winning rate in the subsequent first opening/closing execution mode increases due to the storage balls. In this case, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the storage may be configured to continue until a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, or the storage may be continued until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the second opening/closing execution mode, or The execution mode may be configured to continue until the number of times the execution mode is executed reaches a predetermined number of times. In the former case, the advantageous period (period in which the V winning rate increases) can be defined by time, and in the latter case, it can be defined by the number of times of the first opening/closing execution mode. In the latter case, when the predetermined number of times is set to a plurality of times, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the number of stored times can be increased. For example, when the predetermined number of times is three, if the game balls distributed to the exit exit guide section 203 are stored in the first opening/closing execution mode for the first and second times, additional storage becomes possible. , it is possible to further increase the V winning rate in the third first opening/closing execution mode.

(46) In the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that accumulation can occur in the first opening/closing execution mode (in the first opening/closing execution mode, accumulation is not distributed to the outlet guide section 203). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which game balls are stored in the outlet guide section 203. Thereby, by distributing the winning balls to the exit guide section 203 in the first opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to realize a game in which the V winning rate in the later first opening/closing execution mode is increased. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the accumulation that occurred in the previous first opening/closing execution mode is caused by the passage of a predetermined period from the end of the previous first opening/closing execution mode, or by the next first opening/closing execution mode. It can be canceled based on the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the configurations (39) and (40) above may also be used.

(47) In the seventh embodiment, instead of or in addition to the first distribution member 300, an exit guide portion 203 in which game balls cannot be stored may be provided in the rotating body 201. In this case, there is an exit exit guide part 203 that can store game balls and an exit exit guide part 203 that cannot store game balls, and even for the same exit, different advantages can be provided. Thereby, it is possible to add interest in expecting the former to be distributed to the exit guide section 203.

(48) In the seventh embodiment, the storage is released every round, but the storage may be maintained over a plurality of rounds (for example, 5 rounds). In this case, as the round game progresses, the number of exit guide portions 203 that can accept game balls decreases, and it is possible to realize a game in which the V winnings become higher. However, in order to prevent the player from being too advantageous, it is preferable to increase the number of exit guide sections 203 (for example, about 50).

(49) In the seventh embodiment, one game ball can be stored per one outlet guide section 203, but a configuration that can store a plurality of game balls may be adopted.

(50) In the seventh embodiment, when a game ball is distributed to the exit exit guide section 203, the probability of distribution to the V winning entrance guide section 204 in a later round increases, so that a V winning occurs. Later, we have adopted a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to be distributed to the winning opening guide section 203 than to be distributed to the V winning opening guiding section 204, but as another example, the following configuration may be used.

First, the prize ball is paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning sensor 192 and the losing sensor 193, rather than the detection of the winning ball by the winning sensor 192. In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the downstream side of the V winning passage 191a is bifurcated, the V winning prize sensor 192 is arranged in the first passage 410 which is one branching passage, and the V winning prize sensor 192 is arranged in the first passage 410 which is one branching passage. A game ball detection sensor is not arranged in the second passage 411. Furthermore, a distribution member 412 is arranged at the branch point of both passages 410, 411 to distribute the game balls flowing through the V winning passage 191a into the first passage 410 and the second passage 411. The distribution member 412 is driven and controlled by a drive section (not shown), and the drive section is controlled by a control signal from the main control device 81. On the other hand, no branch passage or distribution member is provided in the exit passage 191b, and all the game balls that have passed through the exit opening 182b are guided to the exit sensor 193.

In the above configuration, before a V winning occurs in one round game, the game balls that have passed through the V winning opening 182a are distributed to the first passage 410 side by the distribution member 412, and after a V winning occurs, the game ball The distribution mode of the distribution member 412 is switched so that the distribution member 412 distributes the balls to the second passage 411 side. As a result, if the game balls are sorted to the V winning hole guide section 204 before the V winning prize occurs, the winning balls (15 pieces) are paid out when the gaming balls pass the V winning sensor 192, but the V winning prize If the game balls are distributed to the V winning hole guide section 204 after the occurrence of , the game balls are ejected without passing through the V winning sensor 192, and no prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the exit guide section 203 after the V winning occurs, the game balls pass through the exit sensor 193 and prize balls (15 pieces) are paid out. In other words, when looking at the presence or absence of prize balls, there is no difference between the V winning hole guide section 204 and the missing hole guide section 203 before the V winning occurs, but after the V winning occurs, the balls are distributed to the missing hole guiding section 203. A prize ball can be obtained only when the player receives a winning ball, and the winning hole guide section 203 is more advantageous for the player than the V winning hole guiding section 204.

In addition, for the purpose of grasping the number of game balls discharged from the accessory device 150, a discharge detection sensor may be provided in the second passage 411 to detect passage of game balls. In this case, it may be configured such that no prize balls are paid out even if a game ball is detected by the sensor, or the number of prize balls is smaller than the number of prize balls when a game ball is detected by the missing sensor 193 (e.g. 3 pieces) may be paid out. In other words, when differentiating the degree of advantage depending on the prize ball, it is not necessarily necessary to make one ball without a prize ball.

Further, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 63, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of prize balls changes before and after the V winning occurs. Specifically, the configuration is such that the prize balls are paid out based on the detection of game balls by the V winning sensor 192 and the losing sensor 193, and before the V winning occurs, a predetermined number of balls are paid out by passing the V winning sensor 192. (For example, 15 prize balls) When passing through the missing sensor 193, a smaller number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) than the above-mentioned predetermined number can be obtained, but after the occurrence of a V winning, the size of the number of prize balls is reversed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained by passing through the V winning sensor 192, and a smaller number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are obtained by passing through the losing sensor 193. As another example, before a V winning occurs, the same number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) can be obtained regardless of whether they pass through the V winning sensor 192 or the losing sensor 193, but after the V winning occurs, , the number of prize balls when passing through the losing sensor 193 is greater than before the V winning occurs (for example, 15 balls), and the number of prize balls when passing the V winning sensor 192 is smaller than before the V winning occurs. (For example, 0 pieces) may be configured. With these configurations as well, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the out-of-play slot guide section 203 rather than to the V-win slot guide section 204 after a V-win occurs.

Incidentally, the game balls sorted to the outlet guide section 203 in the various examples described above may or may not be stored as in the seventh embodiment. Moreover, the above-mentioned various examples can also be applied to a configuration in which a game ball can enter the accessory device without providing the opening/closing accessory 168, as in (18) above.

(51) The configurations described in the first to seventh embodiments and the other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, for example, the warp passage 210 in the first embodiment The configuration of the second distribution member 310 and the configuration of the opening/closing member 400 in the seventh embodiment may be applied in combination. Furthermore, each of the other embodiments described above is different from the first to seventh embodiments, or to a configuration in which some or all of the first to seventh embodiments are combined with each other. Some or all of the configurations may be applied in combination with each other.

(52) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that gives a player a benefit such as a payout of medals if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an active line that can be seen from a display window after the reels have stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The following feature group is based on the background technology that ``Pachinko machines and other gaming machines equipped with variable ball entry devices are known (see Patent Document 1, for example)''. This invention was made with the problem that it was intended to solve.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is met, and in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the normal opening result is determined based on winnings in the operating ports 38, 39) and in the case of the second opening/closing execution mode, a jackpot), thereby executing a specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once. Specific game execution means (a function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
a passage section (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass;
Equipped with
When a game ball passes through the passing section in the specific game, it is more advantageous for the player than when it does not pass through (if the game ball passes through the round game in the continuous variable mode, the next round game is executed. If it passes in the opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing execution mode is executed),
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of specific games is the first game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. Specification means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, second distribution by main controller 81) that allows passing through the passage section in a second specific game executed after the specific game A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of controlling the operation mode of the member 310 and the shutter 221.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode is executed, and a game in which a ball enters the variable ball entry means is executed. When the ball passes through the passage part, the situation becomes advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means passes through the passage section. Normally, the game ball can pass through the passage section that serves as an advantageous opening only in a specific game in which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. In this case, as the specific game ends, there is a possibility that the expectation of an advantageous situation will also disappear.

In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific game is executed multiple times, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is played in the subsequent second specific game. It has a configuration that allows it to pass through the passage section. In this case, if a game ball is allowed to enter the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the chance that the game ball will be in an advantageous state continues even after the end of the first specific game. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the above-mentioned chance ends when the first specific game ends, it is possible to increase the sustainability of anticipation and the level of interest.

In addition, in the above feature A1, "a passage section (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and a game ball passes through the passage section in the specific game" It is more advantageous for the player than if the round game does not pass (if the round game is passed in the continuous variation mode, the next round game will be executed; if the round game is passed in the first opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing execution mode will be executed). "A first passing section (V winning sensor 192) is different from the first passing section as a passing section through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass. a second passage section (displacement sensor 193), and a sorting means (rotating body 201) capable of sorting game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into the first passage section and the second passage section; ), when the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means are distributed to the first passage section by the distribution means, it is more advantageous for the player than when the game balls are distributed to the second passage section. (If the round game is passed in the continuous variation mode, the next round game will be executed; if the round game is passed in the first opening/closing execution mode, the second opening/closing execution mode will be executed). good.

Feature A2. A means (a second distribution member 310, a guiding passage 183, a rotating The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the gaming machine includes a body 201).

According to the above configuration, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game can pass through the passage part in the second specific game that follows, and the second specific game that follows the second specific game. A game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in a game may be able to pass through the passage part in the second specific game as it is. Therefore, when acquiring an advantageous state in the second specific game, there is a chance of acquiring an advantageous state for both the game ball that entered the first specific game and the game ball that entered the second specific game. . This makes it possible to expand opportunities to obtain advantageous conditions and improves interest.

Feature A3. The identifying means is
At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is ejected from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) upstream of the passing section. A retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that can retain the water without causing any
a retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage section in the second specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game ball can be moved toward the passage section by retaining the game ball within the variable ball entry means and releasing the retention. In this case, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage section can be controlled by the timing of releasing the retention, and the game ball can pass through the passage section at a timing that does not depend on the timing at which the ball enters the variable ball entry means. For example, if the game ball is configured to be easily carried over to the second specific game when the ball enters at a specific timing, such as at the end of the first specific game, there is a risk of rampant aiming, but this configuration If so, such acts can be suppressed and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Feature A4. a sorting means (second sorting member 310) capable of sorting the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side;
The sorting means has a first sorting mode (sorting state) in which the game balls can be sorted to the retention means side, and a second sorting mode (non-distributing state) in which the game balls can be sorted to the different sides. (a function of switching and controlling the second distribution member 310 by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is released by the retention release means.

According to the above configuration, after the retention of game balls is released, distribution to the retention means side is allowed. In this case, after a space is secured in the predetermined area where the game balls are retained, the game balls can be guided to the retention means side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that even though the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can be directed toward the retention means, the retention is obstructed by the game balls that are already retained. become.

Feature A5. The retention release means does not release the retention in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and releases the retention in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for.

In the first mode in which the game ball can or easily enters the variable ball entry means, the player's consciousness tends to be focused on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. For this reason, if the retention is canceled under the situation described in the first aspect, there is a risk that the player may miss the release of the retention. In this regard, in the present configuration, the retention is canceled under the situation where the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means or is in the second mode where it is difficult to enter the ball, so it is possible to prevent the release of the retention from being overlooked.

Feature A6. A sorting means (second sorting member 310) capable of sorting game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the first specific game into the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side. Prepare,
The game balls distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means can pass through the passage section in the second specific game, while the game balls distributed to the different side by the distribution means can pass through the passage section in the second specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow passage through the passage section in the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, there is a game in which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is carried over to a subsequent second specific game, and a game in which the game ball is transferred to the passing section in the first specific game. You can build a game that allows you to pass. As a result, the gameplay of a specific game is diversified, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay that has not been seen before. In addition, by intervening the distribution by the distribution means, it is possible to clarify the division of gameplay, and it is possible to suppress confusion among players.

Feature A7. The game machine according to feature A6, characterized in that game balls distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means pass through the passage section more easily than game balls distributed to the different side. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means will be distributed to the retention means side. In addition, when retention occurs, it is easy for the player to have a special impression, and overall the significance of providing the retention means can be enhanced.

In addition, this feature is defined as "the probability that a game ball distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means passes through the passage section is higher than the probability that a game ball distributed to the different side passes through the passage section". You could also say, "It's getting higher."

Feature A8. The probability that a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means will be distributed to the retention means side by the distribution means is lower than the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the different side by the distribution means. The gaming machine described in feature A7.

According to the above configuration, while increasing the significance of providing the retention means, it is possible to prevent it from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

Feature A9. a first sorting means as the sorting means;
A second sorting means (rotating body 201) capable of sorting the game balls sorted to the different sides by the first sorting means to a plurality of passing sections including a specific passing section as the passing section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add interest to the movement of the game balls distributed to different sides by the first distribution means and to provide an opportunity to pass through the passage section. This makes it possible to enjoy the game even when the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means are not distributed to the retention means.

Feature A10. The first sorting means and the second sorting means are visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the visibility of the first sorting means is lower than the visibility of the second sorting means. The gaming machine according to feature A9.

According to the above configuration, by making the visibility of the first distribution means lower than that of the second distribution means, the first distribution means can aim at the timing of distribution to the retention means side. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of On the other hand, regarding the second sorting means, it is possible to make it easier to see how the game balls are sorted, increase interest in the second sorting means, and improve its presence.

Feature A11. According to feature A9 or A10, the game ball whose retention is released by the retention release means is configured to be able to pass through the specific passing section without passing through the second sorting means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, there is no need to consider the retention release ball when designing the operation of the second distribution means, and the control of the second distribution means can be simplified. Furthermore, since the retention release ball does not pass through the second distribution means, interference between the retention release ball and game balls distributed to different sides in the second distribution means is suppressed. . Thereby, when a situation occurs in which one of the game balls is likely to be distributed to a specific passing section, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as being obstructed by the other game ball.

Feature A12. a first release means as the retention release means;
a second release means for releasing the retention so that the game balls in the predetermined area can pass through the passage section in the first specific game;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A11, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a case may occur in which the retention release ball passes through the passage part in the first specific game. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the release timing, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A13. After the start of the specific game, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined termination condition (the number of prizes entered into the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit, or the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened reaches the upper limit). and includes a specific game ending means (a function for executing processing during open operation by the main control device 81) for ending the specific game,
The specific game ending means is characterized in that even if a game ball passes through the passing section before the ending condition is satisfied in the specific game, the specific game can be continued until the ending condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12.

For example, in a configuration where the specific game ends when the game ball passes through the passing section, in the second specific game, the carryover ball from the first specific game passes before the ball enters the variable entry means. If the ball passes through the second specific game, the second specific game ends without any ball entering the ball, which may cause the inconvenience that the second specific game cannot be fully played. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passage section before the termination condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the termination condition is satisfied, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is avoided, and the second It becomes possible to appropriately secure a gaming period for a specific game.

Feature A14. It is equipped with a game state transition means (a function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) for transitioning to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times. ,
The special game state is configured such that the next specific game can be executed based on the game ball passing through the passing section in one specific game,
The specifying means enables, in the special game state, a game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game to be able to pass through the passage section in the second specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a specific game can be executed multiple times, and in that special game state, when the game ball passes through the passage part in one specific game, the next specific game cannot be played. It becomes possible. That is, passing the game ball through the passage section becomes a condition for executing the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first can pass through the passage section in the second specific game that is executed later. becomes. When the game ball passes through the passage part in the second specific game, what becomes executable is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that is executed after the second specific game. When viewed from the first specific game, the game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the implementation of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

Feature A15. The identifying means is
At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is ejected from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) upstream of the passing section. A retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that can retain the water without causing any
a retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage section in the second specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The retention release means is configured to cause the game ball to move to the predetermined area when the game ball has not yet passed through the passage section at a specific timing of the first specific game (timing when the number of prizes entered into the accessory device 150 reaches 8). The game machine according to feature A14, further comprising means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the first specific game can pass through the passage section.

Under a configuration where passing the game ball through the passage section is a condition for implementing the next specific game, even if the game ball can be retained in the first specific game, the game ball will not pass through the passage section. If not, the next specific game will not be played, and the stay will come to nothing. In this case, the player may be greatly disappointed, and there is a risk that the player's desire to play may be diminished. In this regard, in the present configuration, if the ball has not passed through the passing portion at the specific timing of the first specific game, the staying ball is utilized to cause the ball to pass through the passing portion in the first specific game. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the next specific game is not performed while the game balls are retained. In addition, since such relief is limited to cases where there is a ball that stays, it can also be expected to have the effect of increasing the player's desire to cause the ball to stay.

Feature A16. The predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion (operating ports 38, 39) provided in the gaming area,
A configuration in which, based on a game ball passing through the passing portion in the specific game (first opening/closing execution mode), a transition is made to a special gaming state (second opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15.

A specific game is executed based on a game ball entering a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, and if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means passes through the passing section in the specific game, the player Shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous for players. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first can pass through the passage section in the second specific game that follows. . In this case, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, there is a chance to obtain a specific game state with the game ball even after the first specific game ends. For this reason, the level of interest is improved compared to conventional gaming machines in which the above-mentioned chance ends when the first specific game ends.

Feature A17. comprising a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (winning at the operating ports 38, 39),
The predetermined condition is that the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific result (jackpot result),
The gaming state includes a first gaming state (low probability mode) and a second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the lottery result of the lottery means is more likely to reach the specific result than the first gaming state. ,
Features A1 to A16, characterized by comprising means for shifting the gaming state after the end of the specific game to the second gaming state based on the game ball passing through the passing section in the specific game. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passage part in the specific game, the lottery result shifts to the second game state where the specific result is likely to be obtained. Under such a premise, in this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first can pass through the passage section in the second specific game that follows. . In this case, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, there is a chance that the game ball will cause the game to shift to the second game state even after the first specific game ends. For this reason, the level of interest is improved compared to conventional gaming machines in which the above-mentioned chance ends when the first specific game ends.

Feature A18. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is met, and in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the normal opening result is determined based on winnings in the operating ports 38, 39) and in the case of the second opening/closing execution mode, a jackpot), thereby executing a specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once. Specific game execution means (a function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game of the plurality of specific games is played later than the first specific game. Specifying means (second distributing member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, control of the second distributing member 310 and shutter 221 by the main controller 81) for ejecting the ball from the variable entry means in the second specific game of function to control the operation mode), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature A1 can be achieved. Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features A1 to A17 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that for each configuration of features A1 to A18 above, the configuration of any one of features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is met, and in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the normal opening result is determined based on winnings in the operating ports 38, 39) and in the case of the second opening/closing execution mode, a jackpot), thereby executing a specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once. Specific game execution means (a function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a second detection means (V winning sensor 192, losing sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of a game ball from the variable ball entering means;
Specific processing execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
Equipped with
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, the specific process execution means does not perform the specific process for each specific game, but performs one specific process for the specific game a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration capable of executing processing.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once, in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and in that game, a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. When the player hits the ball, a bonus is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specifying process for specifying the remaining status of the game ball in the variable ball entry means is executed. As a result, the movement of game balls into and out of the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of fraudulently obtaining benefits is suppressed.

Normally, the identification process for identifying the remaining status is performed for each specific game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in a specific game must be ejected in that specific game, which limits the degree of freedom in game design. In this regard, according to the present configuration, one specific process is executed for a plurality of specific games, so it is sufficient that the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected correspond to each other in a plurality of specific games. This makes it possible to end a specific game with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, increasing the degree of freedom in game design. Furthermore, since the execution frequency of specific processing can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the processing load of specific processing.

Feature B2. A game state transition means (a function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) for transitioning to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times;
a passage section (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass;
Equipped with
The special game state is configured such that the next specific game can be executed based on the game ball passing through the passing section in one specific game,
The specific processing execution means is configured to be capable of executing one specific processing for a plurality of specific games in the special game state without performing separate specific processing for each specific game. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that:

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a specific game can be executed multiple times, and in that special game state, when the game ball passes through the passage part in one specific game, the next specific game cannot be played. It becomes possible. That is, passing the game ball through the passage section becomes a condition for executing the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, it is possible to execute one of the specific processes for a plurality of specific games in the special game state. In this case, a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in one specific game is carried over to the next specific game and passes through the passage section, thereby realizing a novel gameplay in which the implementation of the specific game is determined. be able to.

Feature B3. The specific processing execution means does not execute the specific processing for each specific game in the special game state, and executes the specific processing in response to the completion of the final specific game (main controller). 81). The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to the above configuration, one specific process is executed for all special gaming states, so the frequency of execution of the specific process is reduced, and the processing load is reduced. In addition, since specific processing is executed in units of special game states, there is no need to switch between allowing game balls to be carried over in one specific game and restricting carryover in other specific games, and there is no need for a configuration that controls whether or not carryover occurs. Processing can be simplified.

Feature B4. ejecting from the variable ball entry means at least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the specific games executed in the special game state; means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210) The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first can pass through the passage section in the second specific game that is executed later. When the game ball passes through the passage part in the second specific game, what becomes executable is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that is executed after the second specific game. When viewed from the first specific game, the game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the implementation of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

In addition, when this feature is applied to feature B3, in order to execute one specific process for the special game state all at once, the configuration is such that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means is carried over to a later specific game. However, it is expected to have the effect of making it possible to appropriately determine residual ball abnormalities.

Feature B5. ejecting from the variable ball entry means at least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the specific games executed in the special game state; means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210),
The carryover is allowed in the first specific game, while the carryover is restricted in the second specific game,
The specific processing execution means does not perform the specific processing corresponding to the end of the first specific game, while the means executes the specific processing corresponding to the end of the second specific game (remaining control by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to feature B2, further comprising a function of executing a ball determination process.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first can pass through the passage section in the second specific game that is executed later. When the game ball passes through the passage part in the second specific game, what becomes executable is the specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game) that is executed after the second specific game. When viewed from the first specific game, the game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the implementation of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

Further, in this configuration, by restricting carryover in the second specific game, it is possible to match the number of balls entered into the variable entry means and the number of balls discharged at the end of the second specific game. Furthermore, since the specific process is performed at the end of the second specific game, the specific process can be executed during the special game state. Thereby, it is possible to quickly grasp the abnormality of the remaining balls, and it is possible to suppress the damage to the gaming hall from increasing in the event of fraudulent activity. Moreover, since the specific process is not executed at the end of the first specific game in which carryover is allowed, it is possible to suppress erroneous determination of remaining ball abnormality.

Feature B6. In the special game state, the specific game can be executed up to a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein at least the specific game before the specific number of times is the second specific game.

Even if the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game before the specific number of times passes through the passage section in the specific game of the specific number of times, the next specific game will not be executed. , there is little benefit for players who are allowed to carry over game balls from the previous specific game a specific number of times. Utilizing such characteristics, in this configuration, the specific game before the specific number of times is set as a specific game for which carrying over is restricted, and the specific process is executed at the end of the specific game. This makes it possible to execute specific processing during the special gaming state without harming the player's interests.

Feature B7. At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game is ejected from the variable ball entry means in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) upstream of the passing section. A retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that can retain the water without causing any
a retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game ball in the predetermined area can pass through the passage section in the second specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve a practically preferable aspect in realizing carrying over of game balls. In particular, after the end of the first specific game, how long the game ball remains in the variable ball entry means can be controlled by the release timing of the retention release means. As a result, game balls can be carried over to the second specific game even if the retention time is not gained by expanding the retention area or lengthening the ball path, thereby suppressing the enlargement of the variable ball entry means and the complexity of the configuration. It becomes possible. Furthermore, by providing a retention release means, it becomes possible to carry over game balls to the second specific game without depending on the timing of occurrence of retention. For example, if the game ball is carried over to the second specific game only when a stagnation occurs at a specific timing, the player will have to pay close attention to the timing when the stagnation occurs, and his or her attention will easily become distracted. Become. In this regard, according to the present configuration, such consideration is not necessary, and it becomes possible to play the game by concentrating on making the game stay.

Feature B8. It is characterized by being equipped with an abnormality response means (a function for executing a game stop process by the main controller 81) that executes an abnormality response process (game stop process) when a remaining ball abnormality is detected as a result of the identification process. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, since the abnormality handling process is executed when a residual ball abnormality is detected, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Feature B9. At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game executed first among the plurality of specific games is placed in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) within the variable ball entry means. ), a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) capable of retaining the ball without ejecting it from the variable entry means;
A release means for releasing the staying (a shutter by the main controller 81 221 in an open state),
Equipped with
According to feature B8, the abnormality handling means includes means for executing the abnormality handling process without releasing the retention by the retention means when the residual ball abnormality is detected. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the retention is not canceled when the abnormality handling process is canceled, it is possible to secure an opportunity for an attendant of the game parlor or the like to attend with the retained balls remaining. As a result, if the staff member or the like is able to confirm that there is no fraudulent activity, it becomes possible to utilize the staying balls to rescue the player.

Feature B10. comprising an abnormality canceling means (a function for executing main processing by the main controller 81) for canceling the abnormality handling process executed by the abnormality handling means,
The abnormality release means includes:
a first means for canceling the abnormality response processing so as to prevent the retention from being canceled when a specific operation is performed (when the power switch 92b is operated without pressing the RAM erase switch 98a);
When an operation different from the specific operation is performed (when the RAM erase switch 98a is pressed and the power switch 92b is operated), the abnormality handling process is canceled so that the retention is canceled. 2 means and
The gaming machine according to feature B9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, by changing the operation mode, it is possible to select whether to leave the staying ball or not and cancel the abnormality handling process. This makes it possible to change the response depending on the confirmation result when it is confirmed by a game hall attendant or the like whether or not the cause of the remaining ball abnormality is fraudulent activity.

Feature B11. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing opening/closing processing by main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode. and,
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Round game execution means (round game) that executes a round game in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is satisfied); A function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81);
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a second detection means (V winning sensor 192, losing sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of a game ball from the variable ball entering means;
Specific processing execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
Equipped with
When the round game is executed a plurality of times, the specific processing execution means does not perform the specific process for each of the round games, but executes one specific process for the plurality of round games. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration capable of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature B1 can be achieved. In addition, in this feature, "round game" means "the number of game balls that entered the variable ball entry means has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the period or number of times that the variable ball entry means is in the second mode. It is possible to express this as "a game that ends when the value reaches a predetermined upper limit." Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features B1 to B10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature B12. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is met, and in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the normal opening result is determined based on winnings in the operating ports 38, 39) and in the case of the second opening/closing execution mode, a jackpot), thereby executing a specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once. Specific game execution means (a function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a second detection means (V winning sensor 192, losing sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of a game ball from the variable ball entering means;
Specific processing execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
Equipped with
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing for entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means and discharging the entered game ball in the specific game at a specific timing after the end of the specific game. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that allows it to play.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once, in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and in that game, a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. When the player hits the ball, a bonus is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specifying process for specifying the remaining status of the game ball in the variable ball entry means is executed. As a result, the movement of game balls into and out of the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of fraudulently obtaining benefits is suppressed.

Normally, the identification process for identifying the remaining status is performed at the end of a specific game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in a specific game must be ejected in that specific game, which limits the degree of freedom in game design. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the end of the specific game, it is sufficient that the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected correspond to each other at this specific timing. This makes it possible to end a specific game with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, increasing the degree of freedom in game design.

Feature B13. The variable ball entry control includes a first control mode (opening/closing patterns P1, P2), and a second control mode (short opening mode) in which the game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first control mode. It has
Among the plurality of specific games, when the specific process is executed after the first specific game that is executed first, in the second specific game that is executed after the first specific game, the second specific game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature B12, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the specific processing in a situation where the variable ball entry control is performed according to a control mode.

Considering the smooth progress of the game, it is preferable to execute these processes in parallel rather than executing the specific process and then the specific game. In this regard, in the above configuration, the second control mode is provided as one mode of the variable ball entry control, and the specific process is performed during the execution period of the control mode. When variable ball entry control is performed in the second control mode, it is difficult for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means, so by performing specific processing in accordance with the period, inconsistency between the number of entering balls and the number of balls ejected can be avoided. can be prevented from occurring. That is, according to this configuration, the specific process can be executed during the second specific game, and smooth progress of the game can be promoted.

Feature B14. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Under a predetermined condition (a jackpot), a round game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once can be executed multiple times. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing by the main controller 81) for transitioning to a special gaming state (second opening/closing execution mode);
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a second detection means (V winning sensor 192, losing sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of a game ball from the variable ball entering means;
Specific processing execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
Means for restricting the execution of the specific process in the predetermined round game executed in the specific game state (such as not executing the remaining ball determination for each round game, or limiting the remaining ball determination at the end of the second to fourth round games) (a function that does not execute judgment) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game enters a special game state, and when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in this state, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, based on the detection results of the first and second detection means, a specifying process for specifying the remaining status of the game ball in the variable ball entry means is executed. As a result, the movement of game balls into and out of the variable ball entry means is monitored, and the act of fraudulently obtaining benefits is suppressed.

Normally, the identification process for identifying the remaining status is performed for each round game, but in this case, it is required that the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected match at the end of the specific game. For this reason, all of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in a specific game must be ejected during that round game, which limits the degree of freedom in game design. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the execution of the specific process is restricted in a predetermined round game in a specific gaming state, it is possible to end the round game with the game ball remaining in the variable ball entry means, The degree of freedom in game design can be increased. Furthermore, since the execution frequency of specific processing can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the processing load of specific processing. Note that each configuration described in any of the features B1 to B13 above may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature B15. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a second detection means (V winning sensor 192, losing sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of a game ball from the variable ball entering means;
Specific processing execution means (by the main controller 81 function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
Equipped with
When the variable ball entry control is executed a plurality of times, the specific processing execution means does not perform the specific processing for each of the variable ball entry controls, and executes the variable ball entry control multiple times. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing one of the specific processings for a game machine.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature B1 can be achieved. Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features B1 to B14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that for each configuration of features B1 to B15 above, the configuration of any one of features A1 to A18, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing opening/closing processing by main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode. and,
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Equipped with
The specific game in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once is a first specific game (first opening/closing execution mode) that is executed according to a first condition, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game. and a second specific game (second opening/closing execution mode) executed under a second condition different from the first condition,
The second condition is that the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passage section (V winning sensor 192),
At least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game is kept in a predetermined area upstream of the passing section (for entrance) until a specific timing after the end of the second specific game. Specification means that can be retained in the guide section 215 (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by the main controller 81) and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in order to produce the second specific game that is advantageous for the player, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means and to pass the game ball through the passage section. Under such circumstances, with this configuration, it is possible to make at least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game remain in the variable ball entry means even after the second specific game ends. It becomes. According to this configuration, after the end of the second specific game, even if the game ball is not entered into the variable ball entry means, the game ball is present in the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the passage section. By passing, a new second specific game is executed. That is, according to this configuration, it becomes possible to generate a new second specific game using the game ball entered by the variable ball entry means during the second specific game, and the interest is improved.

Feature C2. When the second specific game ends, means for causing a case where the stagnation occurs and a case where the stagnation does not occur (executing the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main controller 81) The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to the above configuration, the game balls do not always stay at the end of the second specific game. As a result, it is possible to add the fun of enjoying whether or not it is possible to cause retention at the end of the second specific game, and the interest level is improved compared to the case where the second specific game is only vaguely digested. .

Feature C3. The specifying means includes means (a function of executing the process of step S3009 by the main controller 81) for canceling the retention regardless of the game situation when the specific timing comes after the end of the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2.

In the above configuration, at a specific timing after the second specific game, the retention of the game ball is released regardless of the game situation at that time, so in the gaming machine, the timing at which the retention release ball passes through the passage part and the 1. The timing is not adjusted with the execution timing of a specific game. Therefore, there is room for the player to cause the first specific game to match the timing when the retention release ball passes through the passage section, and this allows the player to enjoy the fun of seeing whether or not both timings match. becomes. In addition, in this feature, "regardless of the game situation" may be rephrased as "regardless of the execution situation of the first specific game."

Feature C4. Feature C3 is characterized in that it comprises a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification indicating the specific timing or the period up to the specific timing is made by the predetermined notification means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when there are staying balls at the end of the second specific game, by referring to the predetermined notification, it is possible to predict the timing at which the staying balls will pass through the passage section. As a result, a game is created in which the first specific game is generated in accordance with the predicted timing, and the interest is improved.

In addition, instead of or in addition to feature C4, ``a specific notification indicating the elapsed period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is made by a predetermined notification means. and further comprising a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means. Also in this case, by referring to the specific notification, it becomes possible to predict the timing at which the staying ball passes through the passage section, and it becomes possible to achieve the same effect as feature C4. In addition, when this feature is provided in addition to feature C4, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means by which the predetermined notification is performed, or may be performed by a different notification means.

Feature C5. a ball entry portion (operating ports 38, 39) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter and which triggers the start of the first specific game;
Holding means (holding ball storage area 114b) capable of holding off execution of the start trigger corresponding to the ball entering when a game ball enters the ball entering section during execution of the second specific game. and,
If the second specific game is on hold at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game based on the hold is executed after the second specific game ends (data setting processing by the main controller 81) ) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game can be generated using the hold, while if there is no hold, the game ball enters the ball entering section. The first specific game cannot be generated unless the player does so. That is, when a hold is caused, it is easier to generate the first specific game than when it is not, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game advantageously. Further, in the above configuration, if a ball enters the ball during execution of the second specific game, the ball is put on hold. Thereby, in the second specific game, it is possible to simultaneously give the player the pleasure of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the fun of entering the game ball into the ball entry section to cause the ball to be held.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the ball entry section is arranged downstream of the variable ball entry means.

According to the above configuration, since the ball entry section is arranged downstream of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of causing a ball to be held due to a spilled ball from the variable ball entry means in the second specific game. . Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's interest even in the game balls that did not enter the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C7. If the first condition is satisfied after the end of the second specific game and the first result is (the value of the acquired open type counter CS is 50 to 99), the first specific game is started at the first timing ( When the first condition is satisfied and the second result is different from the first result (the value of the obtained release type counter CS is 0 to 49). Any one of features C3 to C6, characterized in that the game machine further comprises means for executing the first specific game at a second timing different from the first timing (after an opening waiting time of 0.5 sec has elapsed). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the first specific game when the first condition is satisfied is diversified. In this case, even if the first condition is satisfied by predicting the timing at which the retention release ball passes through the passage part, it becomes difficult to match the passing timing to the execution timing of the first specific game. Thereby, it is possible to suppress aiming and hitting, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature C8. a ball entry portion (operating ports 38, 39) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter and which triggers the start of the first specific game;
Holding means (holding ball storage area 114b) capable of holding off execution of the start trigger corresponding to the ball entering when a game ball enters the ball entering section during execution of the second specific game. and,
If the second specific game is on hold at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game execution means (main controller 81), and
Equipped with
When the first specific game based on the suspension is executed at a first timing (after the release waiting time of 2 seconds has elapsed), the retention release ball that has been released from the retention passes through the passage part in the first specific game. When the ball is in the first state where it can pass or is easy to pass and is executed at a second timing different from the first timing (after the release waiting time of 0.5 sec has elapsed), the retention release ball enters the first specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be in a second state in which it is impossible to pass through the passage portion or in which it is difficult to pass through the passage portion compared to the first state.

According to the above configuration, if there is a hold at the end of the second specific game, the first specific game can be generated using the hold, while if there is no hold, the game ball enters the ball entering section. The first specific game cannot be generated unless the player does so. That is, when a hold is caused, it is easier to generate the first specific game than when it is not, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game advantageously. However, if the first specific game based on suspension is executed at the first timing, the second specific game is more likely to occur, but if it is executed at the second timing, the second specific game is less likely to occur. In other words, simply having a hold at the end of the second specific game does not guarantee success in the second specific game, and the player is in a state where he cannot relax even if he keeps the game ball and causes a hold. becomes. Thereby, it is possible to continue to draw attention to the development of the game after the second specific game ends, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C9. A destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the first specific game based on the suspension is to be executed at the first timing before the execution of the start trigger based on the suspension (a function of executing pre-reading by the main controller 81) )and,
When the first specific game is specified to be executed at the first timing by the destination specifying means, a specific notification is made by a predetermined notification means before the end of the second specific game, notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means;
The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to play the second specific game knowing that if the game balls stay at the end of the second specific game, the possibility of winning consecutive games will increase. Become. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the desire to make the game balls stay at the end of the second specific game, and it is possible to further improve the degree of attention to the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that after the second specific game ends, the game balls staying in the variable ball entry means can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can visually determine whether there is a stagnation, and when a stagnation occurs, it becomes possible to effectively arouse the expectation that a new second specific game will occur.

Feature C11. a first detection means (entrance sensor 179) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
a second detection means (V winning sensor 192, losing sensor 193) capable of detecting discharge of a game ball from the variable ball entering means;
Specific processing execution means (by the main controller 81 (a function to execute remaining ball determination processing),
The specific processing execution means executes the specific processing for the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means and the discharge of the entered game ball in the second specific game, when the staying game ball is the variable entry ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, further comprising means for executing the game after being ejected from the means.

According to the above configuration, even when the second specific game ends with game balls remaining in the variable ball entry means, the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means and the number of balls ejected can be matched in the specific process, It becomes possible to appropriately determine the remaining pitches.

Feature C12. The specific processing execution means is a means for executing the specific processing when a predetermined determination waiting period (6 sec) has elapsed after the end of the second specific game (a function for executing the process of step S3010 by the main controller 81). ),
The game machine according to feature C11, wherein the predetermined determination waiting period is longer than a period until the staying game ball is discharged from the variable ball entry means.

In the above configuration, the specific process is executed in response to the elapse of the determination waiting period after the end of the second specific game, and during the determination waiting period, the staying ball is ejected from the variable ball entering means. It is said to be a longer period than the previous period. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a specific process after ejecting a staying ball without performing a process of checking whether or not the staying ball has been ejected.

Feature C13. If the first specific game is not in progress when the determination waiting period has elapsed, the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing according to the elapse of the judgment waiting period, while In this case, when the first specific game is in progress, means for executing the specific process in response to the end of the first specific game (executing the processes of steps S3012 to S3016 and S3002 to S3005 by the main control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature C12, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

For example, in a configuration in which a specific process is performed in accordance with the elapse of the judgment standby period when the first specific game is in progress when the judgment standby period elapses, a ball enters the variable ball entry means immediately before the elapse of the judgment standby period. However, if the entered game balls are ejected after the period has elapsed, the identification process is executed with the number of ejected balls being smaller than the number of entered balls, leading to an erroneous determination of the remaining ball abnormality. In this regard, in this configuration, if the first specific game is in progress when the determination waiting period elapses, the specific process is performed after the first specific game ends, so the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected are matched. Specific processing can be executed, and the above-mentioned erroneous determination can be suppressed.

Feature C14. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing opening/closing processing by main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode. and,
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Specifying means (second sorting means) capable of causing at least one of the game balls that entered the variable ball entry means during the variable ball entry control to remain in the variable ball entry means even after the variable ball entry control. member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, and a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature C1 can be achieved. Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features C1 to C13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that for each configuration of the features C1 to C14 above, the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode and then changing the variable ball entry control to the second mode (a function for executing processing during control by the main controller 81) )and,
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A specific game execution means (game control by the main controller 81) that executes a specific game (first opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (winning into the actuating ports 38, 39) functions) and
Specifying means (second distribution member 310, shutter 221, warp passage 210, a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The specifying means determines the discharge timing of game balls from the variable entry ball means when the game result after the specific game is the first game result (when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period). When the game result after the specific game is a second game result different from the first game result (when a predetermined period has elapsed without the first opening/closing execution mode occurring), A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

In the above configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in a specific game can be ejected from the variable ball entry means after the specific game. At this time, the timing of ejecting the game balls is diversified into a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing, and the entertainment can be improved compared to the case where the ejection timing is uniform. Further, when the game result after the specific game is the first game result, the first timing is used, and when the game result after the specific game is the second game result, the second timing is used. In this case, the game after the specific game ends will affect the discharge timing of the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game. This increases the interest in the game after the specific game ends, making it possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. According to feature D1, the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on whether the timing of discharging the game ball from the variable ball entry means is the first timing or the second timing. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse strong interest in whether the game result after the specific game is the first game result or the second game result, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game ends is increased. It increases even more.

Feature D3. After the specific game, if the first game result is not achieved, the second game result is obtained,
Feature D1 or D2 is characterized in that it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to discharge the game ball at the first timing than to discharge the game ball at the second timing. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player is motivated to make the game result after the specific game become the first game result, and the degree of attention to the game after the specific game is finished is further increased.

Feature D4. Based on the fact that the game ball entering the variable ball entry means results in a predetermined game result (V winning), a transition is made to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the specific game. Equipped with a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing by the main control device 81),
The first game result is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game,
The specifying means is configured to determine, when the first game result is obtained after the previous specific game, in the subsequent specific game to be executed corresponding to the first game result, the specific game is carried over from the previous specific game. Features D1 to D1 are characterized in that the game ball is equipped with a means for ejecting game balls (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 and S3302 by the main controller 81) so that the game ball obtained by the game ball produces the predetermined game result. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to the above configuration, if the predetermined condition is satisfied by a certain specific timing after the end of the specific game, the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means in the previous specific game can be used to transition to the special game state. I can do it. Thereby, it is possible to provide an advantageous period during which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state after the end of a specific game. As a result, the game after the specific game becomes more exciting, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the advantageous period is configured to be limited to a specific timing, it is possible to create a case where the advantageous period ends while a predetermined condition is not satisfied. This allows the player to enjoy the thrill of playing the game in which the advantageous period may end without the predetermined conditions being met, thereby increasing the level of interest.

Feature D5. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the previous specific game, means for making it possible for the game ball to achieve the predetermined game result in the previous specific game. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the rotating body 201 by the main control device 81.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined game result can be obtained even in the previous specific game. In this case, as an opportunity to transition to a special game state, there is a first opportunity to obtain a predetermined game result in the previous specific game, and a predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing, and a predetermined game result is obtained in the later specific game. A second opportunity and a plurality of opportunities can be provided. Normally, the transition to the special game state is limited to when a predetermined game result is achieved in one specific game, but with this configuration, there is still room to transition to the special game state even after the end of the specific game. This improves interest.

Feature D6. According to feature D4 or D5, the predetermined condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion (operating ports 38, 39) provided in the game area. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined condition is established based on the ball entering the ball entering section, after the end of a specific game, interest in the movement and whereabouts of the game ball on the gaming area increases, and It can enhance the fun of enjoying it. Further, the configuration of feature D4 or D5 can be realized by utilizing an existing control program, and program changes can be kept to a minimum. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the burden of gaming machine design due to program changes.

Feature D7. The identifying means is
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) within the variable ball entry means without being discharged from the variable ball entry means. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
A retention release means for releasing the retention (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81),
The retention canceling means includes means for canceling the retention so that, when the first game result is obtained after the previous specific game, the predetermined game result is obtained in the subsequent specific game. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

According to the above configuration, no matter when the player satisfies the predetermined condition at any timing up to the specific timing, the timing of releasing the hold (variable game ball (timing of ejection from the ball entry means) is controlled. As a result, the player does not have to worry about the timing of the fulfillment of the conditions, and can concentrate on fulfilling the predetermined conditions while playing the game.

In addition, when this feature is applied to feature D5 above, (1) the predetermined game result was achieved in the previous specific game, (2) the predetermined game result was not achieved in the previous specific game, but It is possible to create three states: (1) the game ball was able to stay, and (3) the predetermined game result was not achieved in the previous specific game, and the game ball could not be held. Compared to conventional gaming machines, which have only the option of achieving a predetermined game result or not, it is possible to expand the range of ways to enjoy the game.

Feature D8. The configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player to eject the game ball at the first timing than to eject the game ball at the second timing,
Features D1 to D7 characterized in that the game device includes state means for setting the state after the specific game to a first state and a second state in which the degree of expectation of the first game result is relatively high or low. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the above configuration, since the first game result is advantageous to the player and the expectation level is relatively high or low, the first state and the second state are provided, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous after the specific game. This makes it possible to improve interest.

Feature D9. The first game result is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by a specific timing after the end of the specific game,
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the period up to the specific timing is different between the first state and the second state.

According to the above configuration, the longer the period up to the specific timing, the higher the expectation of the first game result, and the shorter the period, the lower the expectation, so that the player can easily understand and diversify the expectation.

Feature D10. Features D4 to D4, characterized in that the system includes a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification indicating the specific timing or the period up to the specific timing is made by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of D9.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific timing by referring to the predetermined notification. This makes it possible to recognize by what time a predetermined condition should be satisfied, thereby improving the ease of play.

In addition, instead of or in addition to feature D10, "a specific notification indicating the elapsed period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period since the end of the second specific game is made by a predetermined notification means" and further comprising a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means. In this case, by referring to the specific notification, it is possible to grasp the remaining period until the specific timing, and it is possible to effectively arouse the feeling of tension that the advantageous period may end without achieving the first game result. In addition, when this feature is provided in addition to feature D10, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means by which the predetermined notification is performed, or may be performed by a different notification means.

Feature D11. Based on the fact that the game ball entering the variable ball entry means results in a predetermined game result (V winning), a transition is made to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the specific game. Equipped with a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing by the main control device 81),
The identifying means is
At least one of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) within the variable ball entry means without being ejected from the variable ball entry means. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
a retention release means (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81) that releases the retention based on the number of times the specific game has been played reaches a predetermined number;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that the game ball is configured such that the predetermined game result can be achieved by the game ball whose retention is released by the retention release means.

In the above configuration, when the number of times of the specific game reaches a predetermined number, the retention is released, and the retention release ball results in a predetermined game result, and a transition is made to the special game state. This makes it possible to provide relief when the game does not shift to the special game state no matter how many times the specific game is repeated, and the ease of play is improved.

Feature D12. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means for changing the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode and then changing the variable ball entry control to the second mode (a function for executing processing during control by the main controller 81) )and,
a privilege granting means (payout control device 97) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Specification means (a second distribution member 310, a shutter 221, warp passage 210, a function of controlling the operation mode of the second distribution member 310 and the shutter 221 by the main controller 81),
Equipped with
The specifying means determines the discharge timing of game balls from the variable ball entry means when the game result after the variable ball entry control is a first game result (when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs within a predetermined period). ), and the game result after the variable ball entry control is a second game result different from the first game result (when a predetermined period of time has passed without the first opening/closing execution mode occurring). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a second timing different from the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature D1 can be achieved. Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features D1 to D11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that for each configuration of features D1 to D12, the configuration of any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing opening/closing processing by main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode. and,
Under a predetermined condition (a jackpot), a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) is entered in which a specific game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once can be executed multiple times. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing by the main control device 81),
Game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the specific game can be retained in a predetermined area (entrance guide section 215) within the variable ball entry means without being ejected from the variable ball entry means. a retention means (a function of closing the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
a retention release means for releasing the retention so that the game balls in the predetermined area are discharged from the variable ball entry means after the specific game (a function of opening the shutter 221 by the main controller 81);
In the first specific game (3rd to 7th round), which is one of the specific games executed in the special game state, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means was In a second specific game (12th to 16th round) that is more likely to be retained by the retention means and is different from the first particular game, the game balls that have entered the variable entering ball means are more likely to be retained by the retention means than in the first particular game. (a function of executing the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main controller 81),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to cause the game ball that entered the variable entry ball means in a specific game to remain in the variable entry ball means even after the end of the specific game. That is, it is possible to create a case where the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is ejected from the variable ball entry means across a specific game, and novel gaming properties can be provided. In this case, for example, if the ease with which retention means occurs (in other words, the ease with which game balls are carried over) is standardized, the carryover of game balls will become commonplace, and the special game state will be ignored. It could become a game just for digesting. In this regard, with this configuration, retention by the retention means is likely to occur in the first specific game, and retention is less likely to occur in the second specific game, making it possible to diversify the ease with which game balls are carried over. This makes it possible to suppress monotony of the game and increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature E2. a sorting means (second sorting member 310) capable of sorting the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side;
Distribution control means for controlling the distribution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1905 and S1906 by the main control device 81);
Equipped with
The distributing means is controlled so that the distributing manner of the distributing means is common between the first specific game and the second specific game,
According to feature E1, the variable ball entry control is executed so that ease of entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means is different between the first specific game and the second specific game. gaming machines.

In the above configuration, the distribution mode of the distribution means is made common between the first specific game and the second specific game, and the ease of occurrence of retention is made different by variable entrance ball control. In this case, it is not necessary to set the distribution mode of the distribution means and the execution mode of the variable ball entry control in detail for each specific game, and it is sufficient to set only the latter. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load required for control and the work load when designing the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the following effects are expected from the above configuration. In a configuration where game balls are carried over due to the occurrence of stagnation, the attention of the player is likely to be drawn to whether or not stagnation occurs. In this case, it is assumed that the player shows a strong interest in the distribution means that affects whether or not the game stays, and is closely watching its movements. Under such circumstances, if the movement of the allocating means is made different, there is a risk that players will notice this, understand that the difference in the ease of retention is a prearranged arrangement, and become disinterested. In this regard, in the present configuration, since the movement of the allocating means is common to each specific game, such awareness can be suppressed. This makes it easier to feel that the difference in the ease of retention is due to chance, and it is possible to suitably provide the fun of enjoying the behavior of the game ball.

Feature E3. One of the specific games can be divided into a plurality of game sections according to the number of executions of the variable ball entry control,
The distributing means is controlled so that the distributing manner of the distributing means in each of the game sections is common between the first specific game and the second specific game,
The variable ball entry control is executed such that the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in at least one of each of the game sections is different between the first specific game and the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature E2.

In the above configuration, the first specific game and the second specific game have a configuration in which the distribution mode of the distribution means in each game section is common, but the variable ball entry control mode is different in at least one of the game sections. It has become. In this case, by combining a ball entry control mode that makes it easy for the ball to enter the variable ball entry means with a game section in which the distribution means is likely to allocate game balls to the retention means side, it is possible to create a characteristic that makes it easy for the ball to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means. By combining aspects that are difficult to cause stagnation, it is possible to create characteristics that make it difficult for stagnation to occur. In other words, it is possible to easily change the likelihood of stagnation occurring, and it is possible to reduce the design burden of variable ball entry control.

Feature E4. The variable ball entry means includes a passage section (V winning sensor 192) through which a game ball that has entered the ball can pass,
In the special game state, it is possible to perform the next specific game based on the game ball passing through the passing section in one specific game,
Among the game balls that have entered the variable entry means in the specific game, game balls that are not retained by the retention means can pass through the passing section in the particular game, and the game balls retained by the retention means are The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the passing portion can be passed through in the specific game executed after the specific game.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing section in one specific game, it becomes possible to play the next specific game, and passing the game ball through the passing section is a condition for implementing the next specific game. Become. Under such circumstances, with this configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in a specific game, if the game ball is not retained by the retention means, the game ball passes through the passage section in the particular game. If it becomes possible and is retained by the retention means, it is configured to be able to pass through the passage section in a later specific game. According to this configuration, a certain specific game is achieved by a game ball that entered in the immediately preceding specific game, and sometimes by a game ball that entered in a specific game that was even earlier than the immediately preceding specific game. It is possible to create new situations and provide novel gameplay that has not existed in the past. This makes it possible to give a fresh impression to the player and improve interest.

In addition, when applying this feature to feature E2 or E3, "game balls that are not retained by the retention means can pass through the passage section in the particular game, and game balls retained by the retention means are allowed to pass through the passage section in the particular game. "The game balls that have been sorted to the different sides by the sorting means will be able to pass through the passing section in the specific game that will be executed later," and "the game balls that have been sorted to the different sides by the sorting means will be able to pass through the passing section in the specific game, and the sorting means Accordingly, the game balls distributed to the retention means side may be allowed to pass through the passage section in the specific game to be executed after the specific game.

Feature E5. After the start of the specific game, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined termination condition (the number of prizes entered into the accessory device 150 reaches the upper limit, or the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened reaches the upper limit). and includes a specific game ending means (a function for executing processing during open operation by the main control device 81) for ending the specific game,
Feature E4 characterized in that the specific game ending means continues the specific game until the ending condition is satisfied even if the game ball passes through the passing section before the ending condition is satisfied in the specific game. The gaming machine described in .

For example, in a configuration in which a specific game ends when the game ball passes through a passing section, in a later specific game, the carryover ball from the previous specific game passes before the ball enters the variable ball entry means. If the ball passes through the section, the subsequent specific game ends without any ball entering the ball, which may cause the inconvenience of not being able to play the game sufficiently. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passage part before the termination condition is satisfied, the specific game is continued until the termination condition is satisfied, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is avoided, and the game period is can be appropriately secured.

Feature E6. The specific game (second round round game) that is executed for the first time in the special game state is such that the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is in a first state (opening/closing pattern) where the game ball is unlikely to be retained by the retention means. P1 and operation pattern SA), and then changes to a second state (combination of opening/closing pattern P1 and operation pattern SB) in which the stagnation is more likely to occur than in the first state. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5.

In the first specific game, there is no specific game to be executed before that, and there is no carrying over of game balls. Therefore, in order to carry out the next specific game, it is essential that the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game passes through the passage portion in the specific game. In this case, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the passage part when the ball is stuck, the first specific game will end in that state and the next specific game will not be played, and the ball that is stuck will also be wasted. It's easy to worry that it will end. In this regard, in this configuration, after starting in the first state where stagnation is unlikely to occur, it changes to the second state where stagnation is likely to occur, so it is easy to create a situation where the player aims to stagnate after confirming the implementation of the next specific game. , it becomes possible to reduce the player's sense of anxiety.

Note that when this feature is applied to feature E5, the following effects are also expected. Since the specific game ends based on the establishment of the termination condition, if the termination condition is established early, the particular game may end in a short period of time. In this case, if the configuration is such that the second state occurs before the first state, the specific game ends during the second state or immediately after switching to the first state, and the game ball passes through the first specific game. There is a possibility that the opportunity to pass to the department may not be provided satisfactorily. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the first state is entered before the second state, an opportunity for the game ball to pass through the passage part in the first specific game is suitably secured, and the next specific game is facilitated. .

Feature E7. a sorting means (second sorting member 310) capable of sorting the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means into the retention means side and a side different from the retention means side;
The sorting means has a first sorting mode (sorting state) in which the game balls can be sorted to the retention means side, and a second sorting mode (non-distributing state) in which the game balls can be sorted to the different sides. (a function of switching and controlling the second distribution member 310 by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
According to any one of features E1 to E6, the distribution control means includes means for switching the distribution means to the first distribution mode after the retention is released by the retention release means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, after the retention of game balls is released, distribution to the retention means side is allowed. In this case, after a space is secured in the predetermined area where the game balls are retained, the game balls can be guided to the retention means side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that even though the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can be directed toward the retention means, the retention is obstructed by the game balls that are already retained. become.

Feature E8. The retention release means does not release the retention in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the first mode, and releases the retention in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for.

In the first mode in which the game ball can or easily enters the variable ball entry means, the player's consciousness tends to be focused on whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. For this reason, if the retention is canceled under the situation set forth in the first aspect, there is a risk that the player may miss the release of the retention. In this regard, in this configuration, the retention is canceled under the situation where the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means or is in the second mode where it is difficult to enter the ball, so it is possible to prevent the release of the retention from being overlooked.

Note that for each configuration of features E1 to E8, the configuration of any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features F1 to F16, and features G1 to G9. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
A predetermined condition (in the case of a round game, the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is met, and in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the normal opening result is determined based on winnings in the operating ports 38, 39) and in the case of the second opening/closing execution mode, a jackpot), thereby executing a specific game (round game, first opening/closing execution mode, second opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once. Specific game execution means (a function for executing game control processing and game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the specific game is executed a plurality of times, a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game that is executed first among the plurality of specific games, causes the first A specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in a second specific game to be executed after the specific game (a function of storing game balls in the exit guide section 203 by the opening/closing member 400);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game is executed in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode. Normally, whether or not a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means results in an advantageous result is determined at the end of the specific game in which the ball entered the device, but according to this configuration, the first The game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in a specific game is configured to change the degree of advantage in a subsequent second specific game. This makes it possible to play the game in conjunction with subsequent specific games, making it possible to improve the level of interest compared to conventional gaming machines in which the games are independent for each specific game.

Feature F2. The specifying means is configured to specify the second specifying unit when a predetermined game result (a result in which the game ball is sorted to the exit guide section 203) occurs when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game. The degree of advantage in the game is set to the first degree (a state in which the V winning rate increases due to distribution to the exit exit guide section 203), and even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game, the above-mentioned If the predetermined game result is not achieved, the degree of advantage in the second specific game is changed to a second degree that is less favorable than the first degree (a state in which the V winning rate is not high due to no allocation to the exit guide section 203). ) (a function of storing game balls in the outlet guide section 203 by the opening/closing member 400).

For example, if the configuration is such that the advantage is determined when the ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player will be satisfied as soon as the ball enters the variable ball entry means, and the player will become interested in the game ball after the ball enters the variable ball entry means. There is a risk that it will become diluted. In this case, even if the configuration of the variable ball entry means is devised to make the movement of the game ball more interesting after the ball enters, a sufficient performance effect cannot be expected. In this regard, in this configuration, in order to be advantageous in the second specific game, it is not enough just to have the ball enter the variable ball entry means, but a predetermined game result is required. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball after it has entered the ball.

Feature F3. A plurality of receiving parts including at least one first receiving part (V winning hole guide part 204) and at least one second receiving part (outgoing hole guiding part 203) receive the game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means. a sorting means (rotating body 201) for distributing the
A privilege in which a privilege (implementation of the next round game) is given to the player when game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, but the privilege is not granted even when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section. A granting means (a function for executing round update processing by the main controller 81);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the predetermined game result is that game balls that entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game are distributed to the second receiving section.

In the above configuration, a privilege is given when game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, and a privilege is not given when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section. Normally, when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section where no benefits are given, the player only feels disappointed, but with this configuration, the game balls are distributed to the second receiving section in the first specified game. This is a configuration that will be advantageous in the later second specific game. Thereby, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that the player can enjoy regardless of whether the game balls are distributed to either the first receiving section or the second receiving section, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's desire to play. In addition, the second receiving part, which has traditionally been perceived as a disadvantage, functions as a receiving part that increases the degree of advantage, making it possible to add surprise and give a fresh impression to players. Become.

Feature F4. The identifying means is configured to determine whether a game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the second specific game is distributed to the second receiving section when a game ball entered the variable ball entry means in the first specific game. The probability that the game ball is distributed to the first receiving section is a first probability (probability when the V winning rate increases due to distribution to the exit guide section 203), and the probability that the game ball is distributed to the first receiving section is set as the first probability (probability when the V winning rate increases due to distribution to the exit guide section 203), When the entered game balls are not distributed to the second receiving section, the first probability is the probability that the game balls entered into the variable entering ball means in the second specific game are distributed to the first receiving section. A means (a function of storing game balls in the exit guide part 203 by the opening/closing member 400) to make the second probability lower than (the probability when there is no distribution to the exit guide part 203 and the V winning rate does not increase). The gaming machine according to feature F3.

According to the above configuration, if the game balls are distributed to the second receiving part in the first specific game, the game balls are easily distributed to the first receiving part in the second specific game, and in the second specific game. It's easier to get rewards.

Feature F5. The specifying means includes, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving part, an acceptance means (where game balls are stored) that makes it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving part. (function of blocking the exit opening guide part 203),
According to feature F3 or F4, the second specific game can be executed in a state where the acceptance means makes it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving part. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving section, new game balls cannot be accepted into the second receiving section. In this case, among the plurality of receiving sections including the first and second receiving sections, the total number of receiving sections capable of receiving game balls decreases, and the proportion of the first receiving section increases accordingly. Then, since the later second specific game is executed in a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept new game balls, the probability of allocation to the first receiving section increases in the second specific game, making it easier to obtain benefits. Become. In addition, in this feature, "it is difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving section" means that although it is basically not accepted, it is not absolutely impossible, and specific examples thereof include: In the seventh embodiment, there is a situation in which a game ball may be further placed on top of the game ball stored in the exit guide section 203.

Feature F6. The plurality of receiving portions include a third receiving portion that is different from either the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion,
The benefit granting means is configured to not grant the benefit even if game balls are distributed to the third receiving section,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that even if a game ball is received in the third receiving part, a new game ball can be accepted into the third receiving part.

In the above configuration, even if the game balls are distributed to the third receiving part, no privilege is given, and there is no advantage in the second specific game. The presence of such a third receiving section makes it possible to emphasize the superiority of the second receiving section. Furthermore, since the third receiving section is a disappointing receiving section for players, it is assumed that there is a psychology of wanting to avoid being allocated to the third receiving section. As a result, it is expected that the player will pay closer attention to the movement of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game ball.

Feature F7. When the first specific game is executed, means (a function of executing an open process by the main control device 81) for ending the first specific game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined ending condition,
The predetermined end condition includes that the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means reaches a predetermined number (nine);
The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, wherein the total number of game balls that can be received in the second receiving section is greater than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which game balls cannot be accepted into the second receiving section from easily occurring, and it is possible to extend the period during which game balls can be distributed to the second receiving section.

Feature F8. As the receiving means, when a game ball is received in the second receiving part, a means for storing the game ball in the second receiving part (a function of storing the game ball in the exit guide part 203) is provided. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F7, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where game balls are stored in the second receiving part.

According to the above configuration, the game balls stored in the second receiving part block the second receiving part, making it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving part. That is, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving section, it is possible to easily construct a configuration in which the above-mentioned acceptance is not possible. Furthermore, since the storage ball closes the second receiving portion, it is visually easy to understand, and it is also possible to easily understand the gameplay.

Feature F9. comprising a release means (a function for releasing the storage during the middle of the round game) for releasing the state made by the acceptance means that makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball during the second specific game; The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8.

According to the above configuration, the benefit of the game balls being distributed to the second receiving part in the first specific game can only be obtained up to the middle of the second specific game. In this case, if the game balls are not distributed to the first receiving section under advantageous conditions, the player will be forced to aim for distribution to the first receiving section under more disadvantageous conditions. This can heighten the player's sense of tension and increase the level of attention to the game.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature F8, "a canceling means for canceling the state in which acceptance of the new game ball is impossible or difficult made by the accepting means in the middle of the second specific game" ” may be replaced by “a canceling means for canceling the storage of game balls in the second receiving section during the middle of the second specific game.”

Feature F10. The canceling means is provided with a means for canceling the reserve regardless of the gaming situation (a function of canceling the storage after 5 seconds have passed from the start of the round) when a certain timing comes in the middle of the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature F9.

According to the above configuration, the state where the game cannot be accepted is canceled regardless of the gaming situation such as whether or not the game is distributed to the first receiving section. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the sense of tension that the benefit may be lost without being allocated to the first receiving section, and the interest level is improved.

Feature F11. Feature F10 is characterized in that it comprises a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the predetermined notification indicating the specific timing or the period up to the specific timing is made by the predetermined notification means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the player can predict the timing of canceling an unacceptable or difficult state. This makes it easier to understand until when the second specific game is advantageous, and the ease of playing is improved.

In addition, instead of or in addition to feature F11, "a specific notification indicating the elapsed period up to the specific timing or the elapsed period after the end of the second specific game is made by a predetermined notification means" and further comprising a notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means. In this case as well, by referring to the specific notification, it becomes possible to predict the timing of release of the unacceptable state, and it becomes possible to achieve the same effect as the feature F11. In addition, when this feature is provided in addition to the feature F11, the specific notification may be performed by the same notification means as the notification means by which the predetermined notification is performed, or may be performed by a different notification means.

Feature F12. The canceling means is characterized by comprising means for performing the cancellation based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means in the second specific game reaching a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to any one of features F9 to F11.

For example, if a game ball does not easily enter the variable ball entry means, the unacceptable state (advantageous state) may end without being sufficiently distributed by the allocating means. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the state in which game balls cannot be accepted continues until the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches a predetermined number, so an opportunity to receive distribution in an advantageous state is properly secured. can.

Feature F13. a first sorting means as the sorting means;
Upstream of the first sorting means in the variable ball entering means, game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means are placed on the first sorting means side and on a side different from the first sorting means side. a second sorting means (first sorting member 300) for sorting,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features F3 to F12, characterized in that the game ball is configured such that the game balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution means cannot reach the second receiving section. .

If you want to prevent the distribution to the first receiving section from becoming too simple, it is possible to increase the number of second receiving sections or increase the number of game balls accepted into one second receiving section. However, the structures of the first allocating means and the second receiving section may become complicated, which may increase the burden of designing the gaming machine. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the second sorting means reduces the number of game balls heading toward the first sorting means, the number of second receiving sections and the number of game balls received by one second receiving section are reduced. The number can be kept small and the configuration can be simplified. Further, since the second sorting means is involved, the difficulty level of sorting the game balls to the second receiving section is increased, and the sense of accomplishment when the game balls are sorted to the second receiving section can be enhanced.

Feature F14. It is equipped with a game state transition means (a function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) for transitioning to a special game state (second opening/closing execution mode) in which the specific game (round game) can be executed multiple times. ,
In the special game state, the privilege granting means is such that when game balls are distributed to the first receiving section in one of the specific games, the next specific game can be executed as the privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F13.

In the above configuration, there is a special game state in which a specific game can be executed multiple times, and in that special game state, game balls are distributed to the first receiving part in one specific game, so that the next specific game can be played. becomes possible. That is, the distribution of game balls to the first receiving section is a condition for executing the next specific game. Under such a premise, in this configuration, by distributing game balls to the second receiving part in the first specific game, it becomes easier to distribute game balls to the first receiving part in the second specific game later. . When game balls are distributed to the first receiving part in the second specific game, what becomes executable is the specific game to be executed after the second specific game (for convenience, referred to as the third specific game). The third specific game is a specific game that is later than the next specific game when viewed from the first specific game. In other words, according to this configuration, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means in the first specific game affects the implementation of the next and subsequent specific games, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay. It becomes possible.

Feature F15. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (function for executing opening/closing processing by main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode. and,
Round game execution means (round game) that executes a round game in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the second opening/closing execution mode is started or a continuation condition is satisfied); A function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81);
When the round game is executed a plurality of times, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means in the first round game that is executed first among the plurality of round games, A specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the second round game executed after the round game (a function for storing game balls in the exit guide section 203 by the opening/closing member 400);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature F1 can be achieved. In addition, in this feature, "round game" means "the number of game balls that entered the variable ball entry means has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the period or number of times that the variable ball entry means is in the second mode. It is possible to express this as "a game that ends when the value reaches a predetermined upper limit." Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features F1 to F14 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Feature F16. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
A game in which, when the variable ball entry control is executed multiple times, the ball enters the variable ball entry means in the first variable ball entry control that is executed first among the plurality of variable ball entry controls. Specific means for changing the degree of advantage for the player according to the ball in the second variable ball entry control executed after the first variable ball entry control (storing the game ball in the exit exit guide part 203 by the opening/closing member 400) function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature F1 can be achieved. Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features F1 to F15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that for each configuration of the features F1 to F16 above, the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, and features G1 to G9. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
Variable ball entry control means that changes the variable ball entry control from the second mode to the first mode, and then executes variable ball entry control in the second mode (control processing and opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) function) and
Specific game execution means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) that executes a specific game (round game) in which the variable ball entry control is performed at least once under a predetermined condition (the starting condition for the round game is met) ) and
A plurality of receiving parts including at least one first receiving part (V winning hole guide part 204) and at least one second receiving part (outgoing hole guiding part 203) receive the game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means. an allocating means (rotating body 201) capable of allocating to
A privilege in which a privilege (implementation of the next round game) is given to the player when game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, but the privilege is not granted even when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section. A granting means (a function for executing round update processing by the main controller 81);
In the specific game, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, it is more advantageous for the player to have the game balls distributed to the second receiving section than to distribute the game balls to the first receiving section. (a function of storing game balls in the exit opening guide section 203 by the opening/closing member 400, a function of making the exit exit guide section 203 have more prize balls than the V winning opening guide section 204),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game in which variable ball entry control is performed at least once in which the variable ball entry means is in the first mode is executed, and when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, Game balls are distributed to a plurality of receiving sections including a first receiving section and a second receiving section. Then, when the game balls are sorted to the first receiving section, a privilege is given, and when the game balls are sorted to the second receiving section, no privilege is given. Normally, when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section where no benefits are given, the player only feels disappointed, but with this configuration, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, The second receiving section is configured to be more advantageous for the player than the second receiving section. Thereby, regardless of whether the game balls are distributed to either the first receiving section or the second receiving section, it is possible to provide a gaming experience that the player can enjoy, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's desire to play.

Feature G2. The benefit granting means corresponds to the distribution even if game balls are distributed to the first receiving section again in the specific game after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section in the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the benefit is not provided.

In the above configuration, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, even if the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section again, a new benefit corresponding to the distribution is not provided. In this case, as a result of the player being satisfied with the initial distribution to the first receiving section, he loses interest in subsequent distributions, and during the remaining period of the specific game, the attention level to the game balls that entered the variable entry ball means decreases. may decrease. In this respect, after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, the second receiving section becomes more advantageous for the player than the first receiving section, so even after the first distribution to the first receiving section, It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means.

In addition, before the first distribution to the first reception department is made, the first reception department is more advantageous than the second reception department, because the distribution to the first reception department results in the granting of benefits. After the initial allocation to the receiving sections is made, the second receiving section has an advantage over the first receiving section. In other words, the advantageous relationship is reversed before and after the distribution to the first receiving section, and the two games, the game that aims to be distributed to the first receiving section and the game that aims to be distributed to the second receiving section, are combined into one specific game. It can be realized within. This makes it possible to improve the level of interest compared to conventional gaming machines that only guarantee the former.

Feature G3. The specifying means is a means for making it more advantageous for the player as the number of times game balls are distributed to the second receiving section after the game balls are distributed to the first receiving section in the specific game ( The game machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a function in which the V winning rate increases as the number of exit guide sections 203 to which game balls are distributed increases.

For example, if the advantage level does not change even if game balls are repeatedly distributed to the second receiving section, if the distribution to the second receiving section can be achieved once after being distributed to the first receiving section, then the subsequent Interest in games tends to fade. In this regard, with this configuration, the more game balls are distributed to the second receiving section, the more advantageous it becomes, so even after the distribution to the second receiving section is achieved, the motivation to aim for distribution to the second receiving section is maintained. be able to. Thereby, the player can enjoy the game until the end of the specific game, and the interest level is improved.

In addition, this feature is as follows: ``A plurality of the second receiving sections are provided, and the specifying means is configured to sort the game balls by the sorting means after the game balls are sorted to the first receiving section in the specific game. Means for making it more advantageous for the player as the number of the second receiving sections to which the game balls are distributed increases (a function in which the V winning rate increases as the number of exit guide sections 203 to which the game balls are distributed increases) It can also be rephrased as "it is equipped with the following."

Feature G4. The specifying means is configured to distribute game balls to the second receiving section in a first specific game that is executed first among the plurality of specific games when the specific game is executed multiple times. and a means for making it advantageous in a second specific game to be executed after the first specific game (a function to carry over the state in which game balls are stored in the exit guide section 203 to the next round). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

In the above configuration, the allocation to the second receiving section in the first specific game increases the advantage in the second specific game later. In other words, the results of distribution to the second receiving section are reflected across specific games, making it possible to provide novel gameplay.

Feature G5. The specifying means includes, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving part, an acceptance means (where game balls are stored) that makes it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving part. (function of blocking the exit opening guide part 203),
The game according to feature G4, characterized in that the second specific game can be executed in a state where the accepting means makes it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving part. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second receiving part, it becomes impossible or difficult to receive new game balls into the second receiving part. In this case, among the plurality of receiving sections including the first and second receiving sections, the total number of receiving sections capable of receiving game balls decreases, and the proportion of the first receiving section increases accordingly. Then, since the later second specific game is executed in a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept new game balls, the probability of allocation to the first receiving section increases in the second specific game, making it easier to obtain benefits. Become. In addition, in this feature, "it is difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving section" means that although it is basically not accepted, it is not absolutely impossible, and specific examples thereof include: In the seventh embodiment, there is a situation in which a game ball may be further placed on top of the game ball stored in the exit guide section 203.

Feature G6. As the receiving means, when a game ball is received in the second receiving part, a means for storing the game ball in the second receiving part (a function of storing the game ball in the exit guide part 203) is provided. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the second specific game can be executed in a state where game balls are stored in the second receiving part.

According to the above configuration, the game balls stored in the second receiving part block the second receiving part, making it impossible or difficult to accept new game balls into the second receiving part. That is, by utilizing the game balls distributed to the second receiving section, it is possible to easily construct a configuration in which the above-mentioned acceptance is not possible. Furthermore, since the storage ball closes the second receiving portion, it is visually easy to understand, and it is also possible to easily understand the gameplay.

Feature G7. comprising a release means (a function for releasing the storage during the middle of the round game) for releasing the state made by the acceptance means that makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball during the second specific game; The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6.

According to the above configuration, the benefit of the game balls being distributed to the second receiving section in the first specific game can only be obtained up to the middle of the second specific game. In this case, if the game balls are not distributed to the first receiving section under advantageous conditions, the player will be forced to aim for distribution to the first receiving section under more disadvantageous conditions. This can heighten the player's sense of tension and increase the level of attention to the game.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature G6, "a cancellation means for canceling the state made by the acceptance means that makes it impossible or difficult to accept the new game ball in the middle of the second specific game" ” may be replaced by “a canceling means for canceling the storage of game balls in the second receiving section during the middle of the second specific game.”

Feature G8. a first sorting means as the sorting means;
Upstream of the first sorting means in the variable ball entering means, game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means are placed on the first sorting means side and on a side different from the first sorting means side. a second sorting means (first sorting member 300) for sorting,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, characterized in that the game ball is configured such that the game balls distributed to the different sides by the second distribution means cannot reach the second receiving section. .

If you want to prevent the distribution to the first receiving section from becoming too simple, it is possible to increase the number of second receiving sections or increase the number of game balls accepted into one second receiving section. However, the structures of the first allocating means and the second receiving section may become complicated, which may increase the burden of designing the gaming machine. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the second sorting means reduces the number of game balls heading toward the first sorting means, the number of second receiving sections and the number of game balls received by one second receiving section are reduced. The number can be kept small and the configuration can be simplified. Further, since the second sorting means is involved, the difficulty level of sorting the game balls to the second receiving section is increased, and the sense of accomplishment when the game balls are sorted to the second receiving section can be enhanced.

Feature G9. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) that fires a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A first mode (open state) in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter or easily enter the ball, and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is more difficult to enter than the first mode. ) and variable ball entry means (accessory device 150),
The game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means are transferred to a plurality of receiving sections including at least one first receiving section (V winning opening guide section 204) and at least one second receiving section (outside opening guiding section 203). Sorting means (rotating body 201) for sorting;
A privilege in which a privilege (implementation of the next round game) is given to the player when game balls are distributed to the first receiving section, but the privilege is not granted even when game balls are distributed to the second receiving section. A granting means (a function for executing round update processing by the main controller 81);
After the game balls are distributed to the first receiving part, it is more advantageous for the player to have the game balls distributed to the second receiving part than to distribute the game balls to the first receiving part. A specifying means (a function of storing game balls in the outlet guide section 203 using the opening/closing member 400);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the same effect as the above feature G1 can be achieved. Further, each configuration described in any one of the above features G1 to G8 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Note that for each configuration of features G1 to G9 above, the configuration of any one of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E8, and features F1 to F16. It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, or it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The technical idea shown in each of the inventions of each characteristic group A to G described above may be mutually applied to each invention of each characteristic group A to G, or a part or all of them may be combined to form each characteristic group A to G. It may be applied to each invention. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each characteristic group A to G.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball (reel-type game machine using a ball): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to a player is generated, and the invention further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a feeding device that performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and dispensing game balls into the ball tray. 1. A gaming machine comprising a payout device that performs the start operation, and configured such that the operation of the starting operating means becomes effective when game balls are thrown in by the throwing device.

10... Pachinko machine, 38... First operating port, 39... Second operating port, 53... Game ball firing mechanism, 81... Main controller, 92b... Power switch, 97... Payout control device, 98a... RAM erase switch, 114b ...Holding ball storage area, 150...Accessory device, 179...Entrance sensor, 183...Guidance path, 192...V prize winning sensor, 193...Removal sensor, 201...Rotating body, 203...Out exit guide part, 204...V winning prize Mouth guide part, 210... Warp passage, 215... Entrance guide part, 221... Shutter, 300... First distribution member, 310... Second distribution member, 400... Opening/closing member.

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball based on a firing operation by a player;
A variable entry mode that can be switched between a first mode in which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter the ball or enter the ball easily, and a second mode in which the game ball cannot enter the ball or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the first mode. ball means;
Variable ball entry control means that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means changes from the second mode to the first mode, and then changes to the second mode;
means capable of transitioning to a first specific state based on establishment of specific conditions;
Equipped with
At least the first specific state is one in which the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means can be performed,
When a first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first specific state, the first state can be set such that a transition to a second specific state subsequent to the first specific state is executed. and a means for
When the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied in the first specific state, a transition to the second specific state and a transition to a third specific state subsequent to the second specific state occur. means for enabling the second state to be executed;
Equipped with
If neither the first predetermined condition nor the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the first specific state ends, the transition to the second specific state is not executed,
In the first specific state, when the first predetermined condition is not satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a transition to the second specific state is executed based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition. , a gaming machine characterized in that the transition to the third specific state is not executed based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition .

Images